Mfx2550 Field Engineering Manual

MFX-2550 / MFX-2570
Field Engineering Manual
Muratec America, Inc. U.S. Version 4.0
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Battery Precautions
Important
We do not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteries are sold only
as component parts of the main control board, and cannot be purchased separately from us. Ni-
MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries are installed inside the machine as back up memory batter-
ies. Be sure to dispose of them according to local, state and federal regulations.
NOTE
• C ontents of this manual can be changed without prior notice.
• There can be errors in this manual even though we have made best efforts to create the accu-
rate manual. We are not liable for any loss and/or damage that are implemented to the MFP by
using this manual.
• The parts/components that are used in the MFP are delicate and can be easily damaged if
they are not handled in appropriate method. We recommend strongly that maintenance of MFP
should be made by the maintenance engineers who are the authorize service engineers.
• Before starting any work, remove static electricity beforehand.

Table of contents
1 General Description.................................................................................1-1
1.1 Product Description........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................1-4
2 Machine Composition..............................................................................2-1
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence......................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Recording Section..........................................................................................................................2-5
2.3 Image Processing...........................................................................................................................2-7
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram.........................................................................................................2-12
2.5 Circuit board constructions...........................................................................................................2-17
2.6 Sensors........................................................................................................................................2-21
2.7 Function detail and additional information....................................................................................2-23
3 Adjustment Procedures...........................................................................3-1
3.1 Field Service Program Modes........................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment.....................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment..........................................................................................................3-28
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes.........................................................................................3-54
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment...........................................................................................................3-58
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings......................................................................................3-86
3.7 All RAM Clear...............................................................................................................................3-86
3.8 T.30 Monitor.................................................................................................................................3-87
3.9 Printer maintenance mode...........................................................................................................3-90
3.10 Service Report Printing..............................................................................................................3-93
3.11 Monitor speaker..........................................................................................................................3-98
3.12 Test Modes.................................................................................................................................3-98
3.13 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and .....................................................................3-104
Unique Switch Settings............................................................................................................3-104
3.14 Factory Functions.....................................................................................................................3-104
3.15 Line Tests.................................................................................................................................3-109
3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode.................................................................................................3-112
3.17 Consumable order sheet..........................................................................................................3-113
3.18 DRAM Clear.............................................................................................................................3-119
3.19 Life monitor maintenance.........................................................................................................3-119
3.20 Sensor input test......................................................................................................................3-121
3.21 Printer diagnostic mode............................................................................................................3-122
3.22 Network service mode..............................................................................................................3-123
3.23 Flash Rom Sum Check............................................................................................................3-124
3.24 Set Service Report...................................................................................................................3-124
3.25 Printer registration adjustment.................................................................................................3-126
3.26 Reset printer trouble.................................................................................................................3-127
3.27 Cleaning mode.........................................................................................................................3-127
3.28 Key counter mode....................................................................................................................3-128
3.29 Network switch mode...............................................................................................................3-128
3.30 Touch panel adjustment...........................................................................................................3-133
3.31 Printer control parameter mode................................................................................................3-133
3.32 Network capture (Packet capture)............................................................................................3-136
3.33 Storage maintenance...............................................................................................................3-139
3.34 Coverage Rate.........................................................................................................................3-141
3.35 Service function menu..............................................................................................................3-141
3.36 Wire cleaning warning..............................................................................................................3-142
3.37 Installing language...................................................................................................................3-142
3.38 Counter information maintenance............................................................................................3-143
3.39 Asset Number...........................................................................................................................3-143
3.40 Quick Initial settings.................................................................................................................3-144
3.41 Update the software.................................................................................................................3-144
3.42 Network service functions .......................................................................................................3-152
3.43 Quick TWAIN Settings..............................................................................................................3-161
i

4 Troubleshooting Procedures...................................................................4-1
4.1 Troubleshooting flow chart.............................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Initial checks...................................................................................................................................4-2
4.3 Checkout error................................................................................................................................4-3
4.4 Communication tourble..................................................................................................................4-7
4.5 Image quality problems................................................................................................................4-25
4.6 Document trouble.........................................................................................................................4-43
4.7 Recording Paper Jam...................................................................................................................4-46
4.8 Machine malfunction....................................................................................................................4-47
5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Disassembly procedures................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Adjustment.................................................................................................................................5-131
ii

1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
2 3
4
1
13
12
5
11
10 6
9 8 7
No. Name Description

1 ADF cover Open this when a document jams and when cleaning the scanning
area.
2 Document guide This supports the document so that it is fed straight.
3 Document tray Load the document here face up.
4 Document output tray Scanned documents are output here.
5 Bypass tray Used when printing on envelopes, transparencies, and custom paper
sizes.
6 Side cover 1 Open this when paper jams and when replacing the drum cartridge.
7 Side cover 2 An optional paper cassette. Open this when paper jams.
8 Paper level indication The areas indicated in red increase as the paper level in the paper
window cassette decreases.
9 Front cover Open this when replacing the toner cartridge or drum cartridge.
10 Paper cassette 1 This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper.
11 Paper cassette 2 This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper. This cassette is optional.
12 USB connector Connect USB memory here to save scanned images to USB memory or
print images stored on USB memory.
13 Control panel This panel includes the touch panel and the keys required for operation.
1-1

14
24
23 15
22
16
21
20
17
19 18

14 Platen cover This holds down the document.
15 Document glass Load the document here aligned to the top left of the glass.
16 ADF glass This is where documents loaded in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
are scanned.
17 Paper exit tray The copied or printed paper exits with the printed side down in this tray.
18 Main power switch This switch is used to turn the machine ON and OFF. Normally, leave
the power ON. Turn it OFF if you do not use the machine for a long
period of time or move it.
19 Power jack Connect the power cord here.
20 Network connector Connect the LAN cable here.
21 USB port Connect the USB cable here.
22 Phone jack Connect a handset here.
23 External phone jack Connect an external phone (such as an answering machine) here.
24 Telephone line jack Connect the modular cable here.
1-2

25
26
27
28

25 Toner cartridge Load the toner cartridge here.
26 Charge wire cleaning When the print quality drops, move this rod back and forth to clean the
rod charging wire.
27 Drum cartridge Load the drum cartridge here.
28 Toner cartridge lock When replacing the toner cartridge, push this lever down the left side,
lever and then pull out the cartridge.
1-3

1.2 Specifications
Item Specifications
Copy Specifications / General Specifications
Scanning method Color CCD
Acceptable document size FBS: Max. Legal
ADF: Max. Legal
Auto document feeder (sheets) Max:80 sheets
(Letter/Legal 75g/m2 documents)
>Doc. Thickness 0.05 - 0.15mm (Single Sheet)
0.07 - 0.12mm (Multi Sheets)
>Doc. Weight (g/m2) 35.0 - 128.0g/m2 (Single Sheet)
52.0 - 105.0 g/m2 (Multi Sheets)
Paper Media (for MP/Bypass) PlainPaper(60-90g/m^2) , PasteBoard(-120g/m^2), Envelope[D
L(SEF),COM#10(SEF),Monarch(SEF)]
/Postcard[100mm(W) × 148mm(L) (3.9×5.8 inch)], OHP*
*does not guarantee all environments or all OHP films
(suggested OHP film: 3M PP2500)
Resolution (Max) Max:Scanner 600dpi / Printer 600dpi
Continuous copy speed (Max.)
>Letter SEF 25ppm (picking paper from 1st cassette)
Warm up time approx. 20sec. (room temperature: 20°C)
# of copies 1-99
Enlargement/Reduction yes/yes: (FBS/ADF)
>Setting range FBS: 25 - 400% (1% step)
ADF: 25 - 100% (1% step)
>Preset (LTR Setting) LTR: 50% ,64%, 78%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 154%
Recording paper capacity (Std.) 500sheets(Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)*
*20sheets(PasteBoard,Bypass Tray)
(Max.) 500sheets x 2(Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)
*20sheets(PasteBoard,Bypass Tray)
Fax Specifications
Compatibility G3 & Super G3
Resolution (Scanning/Tx/Rx) (horizontal x vertical)
>Super Fine 600dpi × 600lpi or
16 dots/mm×15.4 lines/mm (initial setting)
(406 dpi × 392 lpi)
*Can be switched by user operation
>Fine 8 dots/mm×7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 196 lpi)
>Normal 8 dots/mm×3.85 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 98 lpi)
>Grayscale 8 dots/mm×7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 196 lpi)
Telephone network PSTN
Transmission speed 2sec. level (Super G3)
6sec. (G3)
Coding method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem
>G3: 14400,12000,9600,7200,4800,2400bps
Control signal speed: 300bps
>SuperG3: 33600,31200,28800,26400,24000,
21600,19200,16800,14400,12000,
9600,7200,4800,2400bps
Control signal speed: 2400,1200bps
1-4

Item Specifications
Other Information
Image data memory capacity (Std.) RAM 128MB
Copy&FAX: 66MB
Copy Stored pages: 600pages
Fax Stored pages: 4200pages
Memory Backup (Standard) 72 hours (After 24 hours’ full-charge)
CF card capacity (Std.) 256MB
(Max.) 1GB
Interface Hi-Speed USB2.0(Std.)
Hi-Speed USB2.0 Host(Std.)
Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX(Std.)
Appearance
>Dimensions (W x D x H) MFX-2570 : 520×506×473 mm (Std. 2Way/1cassette)
MFX-2550 : 520×506×446 mm (Std. 2Way/1cassette)
>Dimensions (Max) (W x D x H) MFX-2570 : 520×506×593 mm (Max.: 3Way/2cassette)
MFX-2550 : 520×506×566 mm (Max.: 3Way/2cassette)
>Weight (without consumables) Std. 2Way/1cassette Max.3Way/2cassette
MFX-2570 58.2 lbs. (26.4 kg) 69.2 lbs. (31.4 kg)
MFX-2550 52.7 lbs. (23.9 kg) 63.7 lbs. (28.9 kg)
LCD mono
>LCD size 5.7 inch
>LCD resolution 320dotsx240dots (QVGA)
Character Input method By QWERTY key on touch panel
Power requirements AC 115V±10% 50Hz/60Hz
Power consumption Std. config. / Max. config.
>Low Power mode 11.0/16.0 (W)
>Sleep mode 6.6/7.3 (W)
>Standby MFX-2570: 53.0/59.0 (Wh)
MFX- 2550: 51.0/57.0 (Wh)
>Transmission MFX-2570: 66.0/77.0 (W)
MFX-2550: 42.0/46.0 (W)
>Reception 980/990 (W)
>Copy MFX-2570: 1020/1030 (W)
MFX-2550: 1000/1010 (W)
>Max. MFX-2570: 1020/1030 (W)
MFX-2550: 1000/1010 (W)
Environmental conditions
>Practical temperature 10 - 32 °C (when humidity is 68%)
>Practical humidity 20 - 80 % (when temperature is 30°C)
Scanner Unit
Scanning method
>Scanning method Color CCD
>Lamp White LED array
>Optical resolution (Max.) 600dpi x 600dpi
Color scanning
>Color yes
>Black & White yes
>Grayscale 256 level
Effective scanning width
>Copy
>>A4/Letter Letter:216 mm
>Fax
>>A4/Letter Letter:214 mm
1-5

Item Specifications
Contrast adjustment
>Auto yes, Only Copy mode
>Manual (# of levels) yes (5 levels)
>Modification for the original document Automation (w/o photo mode)
back-ground
Document setting position and Scanning Rear left corner
Alignment (FBS)
Acceptable document size (FBS)
>Auto detection no
>Max. W(mm)×D(mm) 216 x 356 mm (Legal: SEF)
Document Size
>Auto detection no *can detect the length after scanning
>Acceptable Doc. Size
>>Single page Document Through Size
>>>Max. Document Size 216 x 900 mm
>>>Min. Document Size 120 x 100 mm
>>>Doc. thickness 0.05 - 0.15 mm
>>>Doc. Weight (g/m2) 35g/m2 - 128g/m2
>>Multi pages Document Through Size
>>>Max. Document Size 216 x 356 mm
>>>Min. Document Size 216 x 139.5 mm
>>>Doc. thickness 0.07 - 0.12 mm
>>>Doc. Weight (g/m2) 52.0 - 105.0 g/m2
Scanning Alignment (DADF/ADF) Center
Document setting (DADF/ADF) Face up
Auto document feeder (sheets) 80 sheets (Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF))
(DADF/ADF)
Scanning resolution
>Copy (B/W) All modes: 600 dots/inch x 600 lines/inch
(Auto, Text, Photo, Photo/Text, Background Off)
>Fax
>>Memory transmission
>>>Super Fine 600dpi × 600dpi or
16 dots/mm×15.4 lines/mm
(406 dpi × 392 lpi)
>>>Fine 8 dots/mm×7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 196 lpi)
>>>Normal 8 dots/mm×3.85 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 98 lpi)
>>>Grayscale 8 dots/mm×7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 196 lpi)
>>>Background off 8 dots/mm×7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 196 lpi)
>>Real-time transmission
>>>Super Fine 600dpi × 600dpi or
16 dots/mm×15.4 lines/mm
(406 dpi × 392 lpi)
>>>Fine 8 dots/mm×7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 196 lpi)
>>>Normal 8 dots/mm×3.85 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 98 lpi)
>>>Grayscale 16 dots/mm× 15.4 lines/mm
(406 dpi × 392 lpi)
>>>Background off 8 dots/mm×7.7 lines/mm
(203 dpi × 196 lpi)
100dpi x 100dpi
1-6

Item Specifications
>PC-Scan (B/W) (Auto,Text,Text/
Photo,photo,Background)
>>>Optical Resolution 600dpi × 600dpi
300dpi × 300dpi
200dpi × 200dpi
100dpi x 100dpi
Default
>TWAIN 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to Folder (SMB) 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to E-mail 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to FTP 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to User 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to USB 300dpi × 300dpi
>PC-Scan (Color) (Auto,Text,Text/
Photo,photo)
>>>Optical Resolution 600dpi × 600dpi
300dpi × 300dpi
200dpi × 200dpi
100dpi x 100dpi
Default
>TWAIN 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to Folder (SMB) 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to E-mail 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to FTP 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to User 300dpi × 300dpi
>Scan to USB 300dpi × 300dpi
Grayscale (B/W) 256 levels
Primary mode
>Resolution (Fax Tx) yes, Normal/Fine/Super-Fine/Photo/Background off
(default: Normal)
>Doc. Type (Copy) yes, Text/Auto/Photo/Background off
(default: Auto)
> Resolution/Doc. Type (Mono PC Scan) yes, Text/Text&Photo/Photo
yes, 100dpi/200dpi/300dpi/600dpi
(default: 300dpi/Text&Photo(Auto))
> Resolution(Color PC Scan) yes, Text/Text&Photo/Photo
yes, 100dpi/200dpi/300dpi/600dpi
(default: 300dpi/Text&Photo)
>Contrast (Fax Tx) yes, 5levels (default: Normal)
(Copy) yes, Auto, 5levels (default: Auto)
(PC Scan B/W) yes, 5levels (default: Darker)
(PC Scan Color) yes, 5levels (default: Darker)
Confirmation stamp yes (Option, MFX-2570 only)
> Stamp place Bottom of Original, surface
> Stamp color Pink
Printer Unit
Sensitive drum type OPC drum
Printing method Dry & Electrophotographic method
Exposure method LED
Charging Method multi-stylus electrode
Cleaning Method Manual
Developing method Mono Component non-magnetic development method
Fusing method Heat Fixing by the heat roller
1-7

Item Specifications
Recording paper size
(1st - 2nd Cassette) Letter(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF), Legal(SEF)
(Bypass Tray) Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF),

Executive (SEF), A6 (SEF), A5 (SEF/LEF),
A4 (SEF), F4 (SEF), DL (SEF), COM#10 (SEF),
Monarch (SEF), Postcard (SEF),
Custom Size(width:97-216mm, length:140-356mm)
Margin
>Copy
>>Top/Bottom 3mm
>>Left/Right 3mm
>FAX
>>Top/Bottom 3mm
>>Left/Right 3mm
>Printer
>>Top/Bottom 3mm
>>Left/Right 3mm
Print speed (Max.) 25ppm (Letter SEF, print from 1st cassette)
25PPM (H-Letter LEF, print from 1st cassette)
Duplex Print speed (Max.) 6.9ppm (Letter SEF, print from 1st cassette)
Alignment Upper left

Warm up time approx. 20sec. (room temperature: 20°C)
Paper Supply Cassettes + Bypass Tray
Recording paper capacity (Standard) 500sheets (Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)
(Max.) 500sheets (Cassette) x 2 + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)
Recording paper
>Cassette (1st-2nd) 1st: (Standard) / 2nd: (Option)
>Bypass Tray
>>Paper Media (for MP/Bypass) Plain Paper, Pasteboard, Envelope/Postcard, OHP*
* does not guarantee all environments conditions or all OHP
films (suggested OHP film: 3M PP2500)
>>Recording paper size Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF),
Executive (SEF), A6 (SEF), A5 (SEF/LEF),
A4 (SEF), F4 (SEF), DL (SEF), COM#10 (SEF),
Monarch (SEF), Postcard (SEF),
Custom Size(width:97-216mm, length:140-356mm)
* Paper except A4, F4 and A5 (LEF) should be supplied from
Bypass Tray
Weight of Recording paper 60-90 g/m2, 20-24 lb(Cassette)

60-120 g/m2, 20-28 lb (Bypass tray)
Out put type of Recording paper Face down
>Out put paper tray capacity 250 sheets (A4SEF) (N-N environment)
Toner Cartridge Cartridge type with developer
Toner Quantity 16,000 sheets (Letter, 6%, 2-page cycle print) or Driving Time
Drum Cartridge
>Drum Life(2page-cycle print) 30,000 sheets (Letter, 2-page cycle print) and
Driving Time (2-page cycle print)
>Duplex Print yes
>Mechanical Counter yes(option)
Shift tray yes (MFX-2570 only)
*When using paper other than A4, Letter, or Legal size, the
machine may not perform the shift sorting function correctly
due to environmental variation and paper quality.
1-8

Item Specifications
FAX Tx Function
Transmission
>Width of document A4 width
>Length of document 900mm(Normal, Fine, Hfine)
500mm(Ufine)
TTI 22 characters
># of TTI 3
>Subscriber ID 20 characters
Real-time transmission yes (DADF/ADF only)
-When Archiving setting is ON, Scanner TX(RealTime Tx/
Manual Tx) is not be able to use.
Memory transmission
Quick memory transmission yes
Error Correction / Re-transmit yes
>ECM yes
# of transmit reservation 100 commands
> Stamp place Bottom of Original, surface
> Stamp color Pink
FAX Rx Function
Reception Size
>Width of Recording paper Max.A3
>Length of Recording paper No limit
Memory reception yes
Rx print reduction yes
Out-of-Paper receptions yes (250 faxes)
Reception mode FAX Ready, TEL/FAX Ready, FAX/TEL Ready, ANS/FAX
Ready, TEL Ready
Special Function
My Jobs yes
># of Jobs 6
># of characters 40
Title yes
(displays the first 26 characters of registered characters)
># of job steps N/A (no limit)
Soft Key yes
># of Setting 5
>Set available functions (FAX) Resolution, Contrast, Redial, Monitor, Speed-Dial, AutoDist.
Group Tx, Auto Rx, SecurityRx, TTI, Cover Page, Tx Report,
FileFormat, Scan Size, Next Doc., Polling, F-Polling, Polling
Doc., F-Code Tx, F-Code Doc., Closed Tx., ID Check, Memory
Tx, Dialing Options, Boradcast, Mail Address, Mail History,
e-mail Subject, Batch Tx, CheckMail, Delayed Tx, E Gateway,
Duplex Scan(MFX-2570 only), Stamp(Option, MFX-2570 only)
>Set available functions (COPY) Zoom, Card Copy, Duplex Copy, Doc.Size, Doc.Type, Bypass,
Contrast, Sort, Combine, Next Doc., ScanTag
>Set available functions (PRINT) no
>Set available functions (SCAN) Doc.Type, Contrast, Resolution, Zoom, Scan Size, Next Doc.,
Color, DuplexScan, Broadcast, Batch Scan, FileFormat,
Speed-Dial, File Name, Mail Addresss, e-mail Subject, Mail
History, Color Adjust, Attachment, Category, Comments,
TWAIN Box, Scan Path, Hold Time, Stamp(Option, MFX-2570
only)
>Default Setting
>>Copy Doc.Type/Contrast/DuplexCopy/Sort/Card Copy
>>Scan Doc.Type/Contrast/Resolution/FileName/Color
>>Fax Resolution/Contrast/Redial/Monitor/Broadcast
1-9

Item Specifications
Paper Source Setting
>Fax/ List Print yes (OFF, ON)
>Copy yes (OFF, ON)
>PC Print no
Security Communication Function yes
>Confirmation of Broadcast Destinations yes
>Twice Dialing yes
>Security Reception yes
User Access & Usage Control yes
>Communication Administration yes (ON/OFF)
>Copy Administration yes (ON/OFF)
>Scan Administration yes (ON/OFF)
>Print Administration yes (ON/OFF)
Energy Saving yes
>Hard Key on control panel yes
>Low power mode yes (Green LED)
>>Entering time setting range 1-60min
>Sleep Mode yes (Red LED)
>>Entering time setting range 1-120min
>Auto Recover Time Set yes (Start Time/End Time)
Communication Data Archive yes
Day light saving time yes
>Default(Start Day&Time/End Day & Time) Start: 2:00AM on 2nd Sunday of March
End : 2:00AM on 1st Sunday of November
>Start/End Timing Setting yes (by memory switch), month and week
Consumables Auto Order System yes (Send/Print/OFF) (Default : OFF)
># of destinations to order (FAX) 1 location
(1 Service call number can set)
># of destinations to order (E-Mail) 1 location
>Order timing Low Toner Warning/Drum Near End
Service Call Error Notice yes
># of destinations to send notice (E-mail) 3
>Notice Timing when the service call error happens
PC-FAX Basic Function
Support for Network Yes
Communication Protocol HTTP/HTTPS/RAW/LPD
Data Format TIFF
Communication Capability (PC-FAX)
Document Size A3/B4/A4
Coding Method MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Communication Standard T.30(FAX)/T.37(I-FAX)
Transmission Speed Max. 33.6Kbps(FAX)/MAX. 100Mbps(I-FAX)
Tx Function (PC-FAX)
Direct Tx from Applications yes (by FAX Driver)
Tx by Client User yes
Transmit reservation command Exclusive command file
# of Transmit reservation command Less than 100 (less than 90 when using archive function)
Broadcast Transmission
Max. # of Destinations Max.4060
- address book(fax): 2000
- address book(ifax): 2000
- direct input(fax): 30
- direct input(ifax): 30
Group Transmission yes
Max. # of Group address book groups
Fax/E-mail mixed Tx yes
1-10

Item Specifications
Rx Function
Routing Conditions Routing Conditions
All received Fax yes
Routing Conditions setting yes
TSI yes
Partial conditions match yes (prefix match/exact match/suffix match/partial match)
Multiple conditions(OR) no
Caller ID yes
Partial conditions match yes (prefix match/exact match/suffix match/partial match)
Multiple conditions (OR) no
Number display no
Partial conditions match N/A
Multiple conditions(OR) N/A
ITU-T Subaddress/Password yes
Subaddress Multiple no
conditions(OR)
From Address book yes (according to fax/email address in the address book)
RX line N/A
AND/OR no
(“AND” in a routing table, “OR” between the routing tables)
Routing Detination
To User
# of User 200 (fixed)
# of User Group 200 (fixed)
To FAX
by Speed Dial no
by Address Book yes
by Panel no
by LDAP Server no
To Mail
by Address Book yes
by Panel no
by LDAP Server no
The attachment file format TIFF-S/TIFF-F/PDF
To Shared folder
by Shortcut yes
by input folder path no
by Browsing no
Routing protocol
SMB (Windows) yes
NFS(Linux) no
AppleTalk(Mac) no
Attachment file format TIFF/PDF/Encrypted PDF
To FTP
by Panel no
by Shortcut no
To Box yes (share box, delete box)
Expansion setting
>Shared inbox yes
>>Classification no
1-11

Item Specifications
Distribution Schedule
>Always yes
>Day of the Month setting (Start/End) yes
>Day of the Week setting (Start/End, Every yes (can not specify the day”s” of the week with specified time)
week)
>Time setting (Start/End) yes
Auto Print of distributed document (ON/OFF) yes
Routing setting operation from machine control

panel
>Auto Print of distributed document no
>Suspend of routing (by record) yes
>Suspend of routing (All records) yes
Communication Log
Display Communication Log yes (Control Panel/Browser)
Auto Print yes
Manual Print yes (Control Panel/Browser)
File download yes (CSV format only: max. 20)
Copier Function
# of copies 1-99
# of copying job 10 jobs
Enlargement/Reduction yes/yes (FBS), no/yes (DADF/ADF)
>Setting range FBS: 25-400% (1% step)
DADF/ADF: 25-100% (1% step)
>Preset FBS: 50%, 64%, 78%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 154%
DADF/ADF: 50%, 64%, 78%, 100%
Contrast adjustment
>Auto yes
>Manual (# of levels) yes (5 levels)
>Modification for the original document back- Automatic
ground
Copy mode Auto,Text, Text/Photo, Photo,Background
Copy Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Half tone level 256 levels
Automatic Paper Selection yes
Automatic Magnification Selection yes
Duplex copy yes
Electric sorting yes
Rotation copy yes(Only reduction
Auto tray change (limitless paper supply) yes (when Auto Cassette is selected and the same sized paper
is inserted in 1st/2nd cassettes or in the Bypass tray.)
Image edit
>N in 1 copy yes (2 / 4 in 1, rotation support)
>Card Copy yes
>>Document Size Personal Check Size: 2.8 x 6.2inch
Business Check Size: 3.5 x 8.5inch
Credit Card Size: 2.2inch x 3.4inch
2 Credit Card Size: 3.4 x 4.4inch
>>Custom Size Setting yes
1-12

Item Specifications
Dialing / TEL Function
Speed Dial
># of locations 2,000
Auto dial registration name indication yes (when pressing the indication button)
Phone line type Pulse/Tone
On hook dial yes
Caller ID yes
External telephone yes (possible to connect the answering machine)
Phone line Cable yes
Auto Answering yes
Lists
Dial list
>Speed Dial yes
>Group number list yes
My Jobs list yes
Polling
>Reserved documents print yes
Communication reservation
>Reserved documents print yes
Activity journal yes
>Manual printing yes, Latest 100 comms (Fax Tx & Rx, I-Fax Tx & Rx, Scan to
folder, Scan to FTP / independently)
>Auto printing yes, Latest 100 comms (Fax, I-Fax, Scan to folder and Scan to
FTP in total)
Item Specifications
>Daily Printing yes, (Print Time can be Set/ Excluding I-FAX, Folder, FTP /
Print if there is no Tx/Rx)
System settings list yes
T-30 monitor list yes (Service Function)
PC-Print Basic Function
Configuration GDI(Standard) ,PCL/XPS(Option), PS3/PDF Direct(Option)
Support for Local yes, USB2.0 (High Speed)
Support for Network yes, 10/100Mbps(Auto Negotiation or fixed)
Data Transfer Protocol
>Standard TCP/IP
>>LPR yes (IPv4)
>>Port9100 yes
>>>Port9100 SNMP yes
(WindowsXP or later except Windows 2000)
>>>Port9100 PJL yes
>IPP yes (IPv4/IPv6) IPP version1.0
>IPDS yes (with PCL) (with AXIS Print Server) (for IBM AS400)
Print Language
GDI yes (Standard)
PCL5e yes (Option)
PCLxL yes (Option)
PJL Command yes
Font yes
>Latin 80 fonts
>Barcode/OCR 32 fonts (Option) (PCL5e Only)
>Cyrillic 15 fonts (PCL5e Only)
PS3 yes (Option)
Font yes
>Latin 136 fonts
PDF yes (Option), PDF1.7 Compatibility
1-13

Item Specifications
Font yes
>Latin 136 fonts
XPS yes (Option)
Printer Controller (PCL5e/XL)
Text Print Yes(Only Network Connection, Local Connection is not
supported.)
Printer Setting
>I/O Time-Out setting yes (Default: 300 sec.)
>Form Setting[Line/Pages] yes
5 -128 (Default: Auto)
>Resolution yes
600 / 300 (Default: 600dpi)
>CR/LF yes
CR only, LF only/CR=CR+LF, LF=LF/CR=CR, LF=CR+LF/
CR=CR+LF, LF=CR+LF
(Default: CR only, LF only)
PCL Font
>Font Type Yes
(Default: Courier)
>Font Pitch yes
0.44-99.99
(Default: 10.0)
>Font Size yes
4.00-999.75
(Default: 12.0)
>Symbol Set Yes
(Default: PC-8 Code Page 437)
Specification of client PC
>Support PC, WorkStation PC/AT compatible machine
>Support OS
>>Windows 95 (English) no
>>Windows 98 no
>>Windows 98 Second Edition no
>>Windows Millennium Edition no
>>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a or later) no
>>Windows 2000 Professional yes
>>Windows XP Home Edition yes
>>Windows XP Professional yes
>>Windows XP Professional x64 Edition yes
>>Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition yes
>>Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition yes
>>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition yes
>>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition yes
>>Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition yes
>>Windows Server 2003 Datacenter x64 Edition yes
>>Windows Vista Home Basic (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Vista Home Premium (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Vista Business (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Vista Enterprise (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Vista Ultimate (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Server 2008 Standard (x86/x64) yes (TWAIN driver is for network only)
>>Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (x86/ yes (TWAIN driver is for network only)
x64)
>>Windows Server 2008 Datacenter (x86/ yes (TWAIN driver is for network only)
x64)
>>Windows 7 Home Premium (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows 7 Ultimate (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows 7 Professional (x86/x64) yes
1-14

Item Specifications
>>Windows 7 Enterprise (x86/x64) yes
>>MacOS no
>>Linux no
>>UNIX no
>Required Disk Space for driver installation 10MB and over
Scanner Driver yes (TWAIN driver, version 1.9)
>Scanning System TWAIN: Scan box type
>Document Size setting yes
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), H-Letter(LEF)
>Document Type setting no
>Resolution setting No conversion/400/300/200dpi (default: No conversion)
>Image Preview yes
>Scanning area setting no
>Scan Box yes
>># of boxes 30
>># of documents/box 99
>># of pages/document 9999
>>Password yes
>Driver Open Control (Hooters special) no
(no real-time-TWAIN support)
Transferring File Format
>MH no
>MR no
>MMR yes (mono)
>JBIG no
>JPEG yes (color)
>PDF no
Batch Scan
>ON (1 stuck -> 1 file) yes (default)
>Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file) yes
Destinations
>Scan to E-mail Select from AddressBook
Direct address input
Select from E-mail history
LDAP search
User Mail Address
>Scan to Folder Select from Folder Shortcut
Browse
(max. 5 destinations at 1 job)
>Scan to FTP Select from FTP Shortcut
Direct link input
(max. 5 destinations at 1 job)
>Scan to User Select from OfficeBridge Users
ScanTag Function yes (Type A, B, C, D)
Create PDF file with Password lock yes
Encryption algorithm: RC4 40bit/128bit, AES(default: RC4
40bit)
Authority: print, edit, copy
I-FAX Basic Function
Support for Network yes 10/100Mbps (Auto-Detection)
Data Format MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
1-15

Item Specifications
Transmission protocol SMTP/ESMTP
Reception protocol SMTP/POP3
Communication speed Max.100Mbps
Encoding MIME/Base64
Document Size A3/B4/A4 (only A4 from the main unit)
Communication standard ITU-T T.37
Simple mode yes
Full mode yes
Resolution 8dpm×3.85lpm (200×100dpi)
8dpm×7.7lpm (200×200dpi)
16dpm×15.4lpm (400×400dpi)
600×600dpi
Coding method
>MH yes
>MR yes
>MMR yes
>JBIG no
Coding method
TIFF-FX
>Profile-S(A4/MH/200dpi) yes
>Profile-F(A3/MMR/600dpi) yes
>Profile-J(A3/JBIG/600dpi) yes
>Profile-C (A3/JPEG/600dpi) no
PDF
>Image (BW MMR) yes
>Image (C JPEG) no
>characters no
I-FAX Tx Function
I-FAX Tx from Application yes (Use FAX driver)
I-FAX Tx by Client User yes (Browser/Panel)
Transmit reservation command file Dedicated command file
# of Tx Reservation Max 100
(Max. 90 when “Archiving setting is ON)
Broadcast
# of Locations 2,030
- 2000(Address Book)
- 30(Direct Input)
Group Tx yes
# of Groups 200 (fixed)
Security no
S/MIME no
PGP/MIME no
Rx E-mail  Forward to Fax
(Off ramp Gateway)
T.37 Standard (FAX=XXX@XXX) yes
Lightning FAX no
Direct SMTP Transmission yes
Direct DNS no
SIP no
Reroute Tx yes
Fax/E-mail mixed Tx yes
Duplex scanning yes (MFX-2570 only)
Manual duplex scanning no
Auto Document Division
normal mode (1stack  1file) yes
1-16

Item Specifications
Page mode(1page  1file) no
Sheet mode(1Sheet  1file) yes
E-mail resend yes
SMTP Authentication yes
Authentication method LOGIN, PLAIN, CRAM-MD5
I-FAX Rx Function
Text E-mail Reception yes
English yes
Other Language Languages supported by Latin1
Font Bitmap font 1 style (26dot)
Mail Rx with the attachment file
TIFF-FX yes
Profile-S yes
Profile-F yes
Profile-J yes
Profile-C no
PDF
CCITT yes (PDF made by this machine only)
Rx by using POP3 yes
Auto Reception/Auto Print yes
Auto Reception/Manual Print yes (by Received Mail Routing)
Manual Reception yes
APOP Authentication yes
Rx by using SMTP yes
ESMTP Support no
Access Limitation (Filter) yes
Multiplex communication yes (default 1 session)
Printer Driver
Paper Size Setting yes
>(Simplex Printing) [Cassette]
A4(SEF), A5(LEF), F4(SEF)
Letter(SEF), Half-Letter(LEF), Legal(SEF)
[Bypass Tray]
Letter(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF), Legal(SEF),
Executive(SEF), A6(SEF), A5(LEF),
A4(SEF), F4(SEF), DL(SEF), COM#10(SEF),
Monarch(SEF), Postcard(SEF),
Custom Size (width:3.82-8.50 inches, length:5.51-14.01
inches)
>(Duplex Printing) [Cassette]

A4(SEF), F4(SEF)
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF)
[Bypass]
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), A4(SEF), F4(SEF)
default: Letter(LEF)
Custom Paper Setting yes
>Size Edit yes, 50 patterns
>Name 20 characters
>Short Edge 3.82-8.5 inches
97-216mm
>Long Edge 5.51-14.01 inches
140-356mm
Paper Supply Setting yes, Auto/Cassette1-2/Bypass Tray
1-17

Item Specifications
Paper Media Setting Yes
Plain, Pasteboard, OHP, Envelope/Postcard
(Default: Plain)
Cover sheet yes
Sort Print
>Electric Sort yes, (Default: Off)
Offset yes (MFX-2570 only)
*When using paper other than A4, Letter, or Legal size, the
machine may not perform the shift sorting function correctly
due to environmental variation and paper quality.
Resolution
>600x600 dpi yes (default)
>300x300 dpi yes
Toner Saving yes, On/Off (Default: Off)
Preset Enlarge/Reduction yes
>1% zoom yes, 25% - 400% (1% step)
Fit to Paper yes
Combine Print yes (2-up/4-up/8-up)
Duplex Print yes
Watermarks GDI: no / PCL&PS: yes (default: OFF)
Security Print yes
TrueType Mode GDI: no / PCL&PS: yes
Specification of client PC
>Support PC, WorkStation PC/AT compatible machine
>Support OS
>>Windows95 (English) no
>>Windows 98 no
>>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a or later) no
>>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 yes
Edition
>>Windows Server 2003 Datacenter x64 yes
Edition
>>Windows Server 2008 Standard (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Server 2008 Datacenter (x86/x64) yes
1-18

Item Specifications
>>Mac (10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5) yes (PS3 w/ PPD only)
>>Linux yes (PS3 w/ PPD only)
(RedHat 9, 3, 4, 5/ SUSE 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11/
Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10/ /Tunbo LinuxFUJI 11/
Debian 4)
>>Unix
>>>Sun Solaris yes (PCL 5e, PS3)
Version: 9 / 10
>>>HP-UX yes (PCL 5e, PS3)
Version: 11i v1/ 11i v1.5 / 11i v1.6 / 11i v2/11i v3
>>>AIX yes (PCL 5e, PS3)
タ
Version: 5L 5.3 / 6.1
>>>Others
>>AS400 yes (PCL 5e only)
Version:V5R1 / V5R2 / V5R3 / V5R4 / V6R1
>>Citrix
>CPU Depends on the Operation System
>Required Memory quantity Depends on the Operation System
>Required Disk Space for Driver Installation 10MB and more
Others
>HP PJL Support GDI: no / PCL: yes
>Citrix yes
Citrix Presentation Server 4.5(XenAPP 4.5)
w/ Windows Server 2003 x86
>Shared Print(Microsoft Point and Print) yes (Only STD-TCP/IP)
*XPS does not supports the following combinations.
**Client: Windows Vista x64 / Server Windows 2008 x64
**Client: Windows 2008 x64 / Server Windows2008 x64
>Oracle no
>SAP yes (PCL 5e, PS3)
Version:SAP R/3 Enterprise(4.7),
SAP ERP 2004,
SAP ERP 6.0
Fax Driver
Fit to Page yes
Coding Method MMR
Resolution
> 8 dpm×7.7 lpm (200×200 dpi) yes
> 16 dpm×15.4 lpm (400×400 dpi) yes
> 24 dpm×23.1 lpm (600×600 dpi) yes
Halftone 256 levels (Dither Matrix)
8 dpm×7.7 lpm (200×200 dpi)
Support for OS
>Support OS
>>Windows95 (English) no
>>Windows 98 no
>>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a and no
later)
1-19

Item Specifications
>>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 yes
Edition
>>Windows Server 2003 Datacenter x64 yes
Edition
>>Windows Server 2008 Standard (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (x86/x64) yes
>>Windows Server 2008 Datacenter (x86/x64) yes
>>Mac no
>>Linux no
>>Unix no
>>>Sun Solaris no
>>>HP-UX no
>>>AIX no
>>>Others no
>>AS400 no
>>Citrix yes (supported by specific version and settings)
Shared Print (Microsoft Point and Print) yes (Only STD-TCP/IP) (Only Simple Mode)
(WindowsOS except Windows2000(Client/Server)
PC Utility
TIFF Maker yes
Cover Page Editor yes
Info Monitor yes
Address Book Setting (OfficeBridge)
Address Book yes
Stored Location CF Storage
# of Address 2,000
Address Book Import/Export
>CSV yes
>vCard yes
Group
># of Groups 200
User Information Setting (OfficeBridge)
Display/Setting Method Browser
User Information Operation
>New Registration yes (only for Admin.)
>Edit yes (Admin can edit all users’ data, but user can edit only his
own data.)
>Delete yes (only for Admin.)
>Forced Delete yes (only for Admin.)
>Import/Export yes (only for Admin.)
>vCard Format yes (Name/Company/Fax/E-mail)
User Information Item
>User Name 64 characters
>User ID yes 64 characters
>Password 28 characters
1-20

Item Specifications
>Type (Gateway User) no
>Company 50 characters
>Department Name (User Group Name) 100 characters
>Group Name yes
>TEL 40 digits
>Fax 40 digits
>E-mail Address 50 characters
>LDAP Server Login yes
TCP/IP Settings
Setting Method yes (Control panel/Browser)
TCP/IP Setting
IP Address yes
Subnet Mask yes
Gateway Address yes (max. 1 addresses)
DNS Server Address yes (max. 2 addresses)
DNS Suffix yes
DHCP Setting (ON/OFF) yes, renew command is supported
Network Environment Initialize yes
MAC Address Display yes
PING yes (Control panel only)
SMB Setting yes
NetBIOS yes
Workgroup yes
WINS yes (max. 1 address)
HTTP Port No. Change yes
HTTPS Port No. Change yes
Client Port No. Change no
InfoMonitor Port No. Change no
OfficeBridge Port No. for searching Change yes
RAW port No. Change yes
E-mail Settings (only Admin.)
Attachment File Format TIFF-FX(Profile-S)
TIFF-FX(Profile-F)
PDF
Coding Method of TIFF-FX (Profile-F) MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Archive Settings (only Admin.)
Auto Archiving ON/OFF yes (Control panel/Browser)
Documents for Archiving
Memory Tx Fax yes
PC-Fax Tx yes
Tx I-Fax yes
Memory Rx Fax yes
Rx I-Fax yes
Fax Forward Tx no
Real-time Tx Fax no
Manual Tx Fax no
F-code Secure Box Rx Fax no
F-code Bulletin Box Rx Fax no
Polling Rx Fax no
F-code Polling Rx Fax no
Polling Tx Fax no
F-code Polling Tx Fax no
Scanned Document no
Print Document no
1-21

Item Specifications
Copy Document no
Report Tx no
Canceled Jobs no
Archiving Destinations
E-mail Address yes
Fax Number yes
Folder yes
FTP Address no
User no
File Format of archived document PDF / TIFF-S / TIFF (default: TIFF-S)
Index file of archived documents yes, when the network folder is selected as destination (CSV
format, up to 1000 logs in 1 file)
Data Type yes
Communication Executed Time yes
File Name yes
File Path yes
# of pages yes
Sender yes
Destination yes
Communication Result no
Archiving setting by user no
Network Scan Setting (only Admin.)
Batch Scan Setting
ON (1 stuck -> 1 file) yes (default)
OFF(1 page -> 1 file) no
Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file) yes
Storage Period of scanned Document yes,1-99 days/Indefinite (default: 30days)
Shortcut Settings
Create Folder Short-cut yes (max. 300 short-cuts)
The # of shortcut increase by CF quantity no
increase
Create FTP URL Short-cut yes (max. 20 short-cuts)
The # of shortcut increase by CF quantity no
increase
Initial Settings (only Admin.)
File format of preview document
TIFF yes (default)
PDF yes
File format of documents downloaded from
OfficeBridge (CF)
TIFF yes (default)
PDF yes
Delete/Leave documents after download yes
SNMP Agent Setting
Setting Method Browser
Service Activate ON/OFF yes
Agent Recognition Setting yes
Contact Destination yes
Name yes
Location yes
Security Setting yes
Community Name yes
- Write: “private”
- Read: “public”
SNMP Agent Initialize yes
Version 1
1-22

Item Specifications
MIB (Management Information Base)
MIB support version MIB-2
Standard MIB Information
Private MIB Information
LDAP Basic Specification
LDAP Supported Version Version.2 no
Version.3 yes
LDAP Operation
Search yes
Programmable LDAP Server
# of LDAP Server 5
LDAP Setting Parameters
Name yes, 23 characters
LDAP Server Name yes, 99 characters
IP Address yes
LDAP Port # yes
Search Base yes, 99 characters
Auto detection of the search starting point yes
# of max. results setting yes, 001-100 (default 50)
Time Limit yes, 0000-9999 (default: 0000 = Unlimited)
Authentication
anonymous yes
name yes
name+password yes
Description yes, 49 characters
Search Method Any, Initial, Final, Equal, Not Use
LDAP Search Operation
Search Method
Name yes
Default Name Description1 cn
Default Name Description2 commonname
# of characters 49 characters
E-Mail yes
Default E-Mail Description1 mail
Default E-Mail Description2 -
Fax # yes
Default Fax Description1 facsimileTelephoneNumber
Default Fax Description2 -
TEL# yes
Default TEL Description1 telephonenumber
Default TEL Description1 -
Organization no
Default Organization Description1 N/A
Default Organization Description1 N/A
# of characters N/A
Company Name yes
Company Name Default1 company
Company Name Default2 o
Search Rule Setting yes
Default setting
1-23

Item Specifications
Search Key Rule Setting
Equal yes
Initial yes
Final yes
Any yes (default)
Not Equal no
Not Any no
Exist no
Not Use yes
Operation Interface
MFP Control Panel yes
Browser via network yes(Multi Clients)
Supported character codes
US ASCII yes
UTF-8 yes (Shift JIS, Latin1)
Supported directory servers
Active directory on Microsoft Windows 2000 yes
server (ENG)
server (ENG)
server (ENG)
Novell e-Directory on Windows 2000 no
server(ENG)
OpenLDAP on LINUX(ENG) yes
Supported Authentication Servers
Windows NT 4.0 Server SP4 later no
Windows 2000 Server(Active Directory) yes
Windows Server 2003(Active Directory) yes
Windows Server 2008(Active Directory) yes
Supported Protocol for Authentication
Windows NT 4.0 Server N/A
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003/ Kerberos v5
Windows Server 2008
Kerberos Basic Functions
Encryption Type RC4 HMAC
Renewal of Tickets no
Cache of Tickets no
Clock Synchronization Method SNTP version1
LDAP Basic Functions for MFP Authentication
SASL Support GSSAPI(only Network Authentication)
Search Filter (UserPrincipalName=<user>@<domain>)
<user> : user name
<domain> : domain name
Search Attributes displayName
Search Start Point The domain at each level is specified by “dc=”.
Auto detection of the search starting point yes
Search Method of Authentication Server
Windows NT 4.0 Server N/A
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003 DNS
Authentication of Domain with Mutual Trust
Windows NT 4.0 Server no
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003 yes
1-24

Item Specifications
Mail Address Relation
Acquisition of User Mail Address
Windows NT 4.0 Server no
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003 yes
Use of Mail Address of Equipment When the user mail address was not able to be acquired.
From Format displayName<mail> or cn<mail>
Network Authentication Settings
Automatic Logout Function Support yes
Range of Automatic Logout Time 1-10(minites)
Default Automatic Logout Time 3(minites)
Number of characters that can be input
User Name 64
Password 28
Domain Name 255
Windows NT Server N/A
Active Directory 255
User Authentication
MFP Control Panel yes
Browser via network yes
PC-Print yes
PC-FAX yes
TWAIN no
Optional Kits
Paper supply unit yes, Universal type
Handset yes
Printer controller kit yes
PostScript3 Kit yes
Barcode/OCR Font yes
PS3 & Barcode/OCR Font yes
Mechanical counter yes
Expandable CF Memory for Network board yes
Expandable CF Memory for PCL board (for yes
PDF Direct Print)
Foreign Device Interface yes
1-25

2 Machine Composition
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence
2.1.1 Auto Document Feeder (ADF) Section
ADF (Auto Document Feeder) is a device that feeds the document continuously one page by one to
the scanning section automatically. It consists mainly of document tray, Tx cover, inner guide, and
platen cover. When the device is categorized by its functions, it consists of separator section that
picks up each page of documents, register section that detects the leading edge of the document and
controls the timing so that the document does not skew, and scan section that scans the document.
The register section is for MFX-2570 only.
MFX-2550
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
MFX-2570
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
No. Part name No. Part name
1 Press roller 13 Home sensor
2 DS2 sensor 14 Mirror B
3 Feed roller 15 CCD
4 Separate roller
5 Separate pad 16 CCD
6 Pickup roller 17 Mirror
7 DS1 sensor 18 Lens
8 Exit roller 19 Reflect tape
9 Mirror A 20 Lamp
10 Mirror C 21 Mirror
11 Mirror A 22 Mirror
12 Lens
2-1

Document insert section / separator section
The machine scans up to letter paper size document width. Place the document to the center of the
document tray and align the document guide.
By pressing the start key through copy or transmission commands, the motor starts driving, and the
driving force is transferred to the pick up roller through gears, and the document will be fed.
Document separator section consists mainly of separate roller and separate pad.
The document will be fed from the upper pages. Remaining documents are separated by the friction
of the separate pad and only the top page will fed by the separate roller.
Register section (MFX-2570 only)

Following the document separation, the separate roller transfers the document to register section.
During this transfer, clutch 2 (CL2) which drives the register roller is turned off and the document
leading edge stops at the register roller. The separate roller feeds the document forward, and that pre-
vents the document to skew.
The document sensor (DRS) is placed between the separator section and the register roller to detect
the leading edge of the document.
When the document leading edge passes the sensor and the loop is made, clutch 1 (CL1) runs idle
(turns off) and clutch 2 runs (turns on) and the register roller transfers the document to the scan posi-
tion
Original Detection
The sizes of the documents are detected by the following sensors;

Detection Action Sensor
Document presence Detects whether there is a document on DS1
the tray or not

Leading and trailing edge Detects the leading and trailing edge of DS2
detection the feeding document DS3 (Back side, MFX-
2570 only)
DRS (MFX-2570 only)
Scanning section
The document sensor (DS2) is placed at scanning position to detect the leading edge and trailing
edge of the document.
When the leading edge is detected, the feed roller transfers the document a certain steps where the
scanning begins. When the trailing edge is detected, the feed roller transfers the document a certain
steps where the scanning ends.
If the document has two or more pages, feeding of the next page begins when the former page scan-
ning ends, and the page is scanned in the same way.
The steps where scanning begins can be adjusted with machine parameter 013, and the steps where
scanning ends by machine parameter 014.
2-2

2.1.2 Flat Bed Scannser (FBS) section
The FBS (Flat Bed Scanner) section consists of document glass (pane), optical reading section, scan-
ner frame Assy, and scanner driving section.
A lamp (White light LED array) is on the scanner frame, and the light reflected from the document
passes through four mirrors and a lends to form a reduced image on CCD sensor as the scanner
motor moves the scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical
image signal.
Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

During scanning, the scanner frame projects an even amount of light from the exposure lamp onto the
entire surface of the document. The light is reflected from the original to the mirror through the lens to
the CCD. The scanner frame is driven by the FBS motor and scanner drive belts.
The scanner frame driving speed is determined by zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode. It is
at home position where ADF scanning begins. The home sensor watches this position.
5 2
3
4
No. Part name No. Part name
1 FBS motor 4 Lens
2 Lamp (LED) 5 CCD PCB
3 Scanner frame 6 Home sensor
2-3

Exposure Section: Construction and Function
1 2
1 Reflector tape
The reflector tape reflects the light from the exposure lamp and supplements its illumination.
This helps to lighten the shadow that is made when copying a document not touching the
document glass such as a opened book.
2 Exposure lamp
A white LED array is used to illuminate the document.
3 Mirror A
Directs the reflected light from the document to the lends.
2-4

2.2 Recording Section
Recording Paper Feed Path
A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup
roller. The paper is fed along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller. Then it is fed by the
rotation of the register roller.
At duplex printing, the paper is transferred to the exit when the first side of paper is printed. After a few
steps after the PDS and DPS sensor detecte the paper trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and
the paper is transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers.
The paper reaches to the image transfer area inside out, and the second side of the paper is printed.
2-5

Finisher mechanism
When finishing the printouts using the shift sort function, every second set of printout will be shifted 1
inch off to the horizontal direction of paper and ejected on the tray.
Paper exit direction Shift direction (1 inch)
When the trailing edge of paper is nipped only by exit roller pair, the shift motor drives, and the exit
roller pair will be shifted to the shift position. After the paper ejection, the exit roller pair return to their
original position. The machine detects that the rollers have returned to their original position by the
shift sensor.
1 2 3
No. Part name

1 Shift sensor (Shift motor home position detection sensor)
2 Exit roller pair
3 Shift motor
2-6

2.3 Image Processing
The image processing is roughly divide into the following steps:
1. Drum Charging
2. Drum Exposure
3. Development
4. Image transfer
5. Fusing
6. Erasing
7. Cleaning
Drum charging
Fusing
Cleaning
Exposure
Drum
Eraser Lamp
Image transfer
Development
2.3.1 Drum Charge

The Drum is charged with corona discharge before LED exposure. A charge wire and a charge grid
are used for the charging method. The corona discharge generates little ozone in the printer. It also
keeps the wire from becoming dirty. Because the discharge, the Drum can be charged evenly.
2.3.2 Drum Exposure

The light makes an invisible static image from the LED print head.
The LED print head, located inside the printer cover, closes down over the drum and projects light
onto the drum surface. When the document is to be printed, individual elements in the LED print head
turn on and expose the drum wherever a dark area should appear in the document.
2-7

2.3.3 Development
Toner is applied to the invisible static image on the Drum and a toner image is created on the surface.
Toner agitator
Drum
Developing roller
Toner supply roller
Part Name Function

1 Toner Agitator Agitates toner.
2 Toner supply Roller Transports the toner to the developing roller.
3 Developing Roller Carries the toner to the Drum surface for development.
4 Drum Exposed by LED light to create an invisible image and
rotates to carry the developed image to the paper surface.
2.3.4 Image Transfer

Image transfer is the process of transferring the toner image created on the Drum in the develop-
ing process to paper. In the Roller Image Transfer, there is little generation of ozone due to corona
discharge. Also, there is no blur of toner because the paper is always pressed by the Drum and the
Image Transfer Roller.
Image transfer roller
PC Drum
High voltage unit - output
2-8

2.3.5 Erasing
An LED lamp exposes the Drum surface. When it is exposed the drum charge erases. This helps the
drum to be recharged evenly at the next step of charging.
Drum
LED Lamp
2.3.6 Cleaning
The residual toner or paper dust must be removed from the drum. Paper dust is removed from the
drum surface by a rubber roller. And then by a metallic roller, and finally scraped off.
The residual toner is removed by the developing roller and toner supply roller, and is recycled.
Cleaning
Drum
Development
2-9

2.3.7 Fusing
An Overview
The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.
A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The toner image is fused by Heater Roller heated
by the Heater Lamp, and securely fixed by the pressure between the Heater roller and Press rollers.
A Thermistor detects and controls the Heater Roller temperature.
The Thermostat functions when the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a
high temperature malfunction.
Press roller
Exit roller
Paper separate blade
Thermistor
Press roller
Heater lamp
Heater roller
2-10

Fusing Temperature Control Circuit
The Thermistor detects the surface temperature of the Heater Roller and inputs that analog voltage
into the Main Control PCB. Corresponding to this data, the Heater Lamp ON/OFF signal is output to
the Heater ON/OFF switch of the power supply unit, causing the Heater Lamp to turn ON or OFF to
control the fusing temperature.
When the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a high temperature malfunc-
tion, the thermostat shuts down the power to the heater lamp. When the thermostat is malfunction, the
thermal cut-off shuts down the power to the heater lamp.
AC Inlet Power supply unit Main Control PCB

N Heater Fusing temperature
on/off switch control circuit
L
Main switch
Fusing unit Thermistor
Heater Lamp
Thermostat Thermal cut-off
Fusing temperature
1) Warming Up After the initialization of the printer, warming up of the printer starts and the
Heater Lamp turns ON until the temperature of the Heater Roller reaches ap-
prox. 140 °C.
2) Printing When the printer obtains the printing command from its controller, the Heater
Roller is maintained at 170, 185 or 206 °C .
After printing, the printer turns to ready mode. The fuser kept at low tempera-
ture.
3) Ready The Heater Roller maintained at approx. 110 °C.
4) Energy save mode In this mode, saving the power.
Temperature
( F) ( C)
402 206
365 185 Post card, envelope, or transparency
338 170 Small size paper (A5 and half-letter)
230 110
Warming up Printing Ready mode Energy save mode Time
Power ON
2-11

2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram
2010.02.24
PRINTER FRAME / DC41050010

P18 DA7-08360-50
HVTR CLEANING1(HV)
1 1
HVTS DA7-08370-50
2 2 CLEANING2(HV)
HVTN
3 3
HVTP DA7-08380-50
4 4
5
HVBS
5
PCB DEVELOPER1(HV)
HVBN DA7-08390-50
6
HVRLR
6 PSU HV DEVELOPER2(HV)
FAX FRAME/ DC41030010
7 7
8
HVLMT
8 Z90-48829-00 DA7-08410-50
HVCP CHARGER(HV)
P3 9 9
CN201 XH XAD GND
10 10 DA7-08420-50
PCON GND GRID(HV)
1 1 24 24 11 11
HT1 +24VF
3P 2 2
HT2
22 22 12 12 DA7-08430-50
TRANSFER(HV)
3 3 20 20 (B to B)
INLET 4 4
+24VP
18 18
+24VP
5 5 16 16
+24V
6 6 14 14
AC SWITCH +24V
7 7 12 12
GND
8 8 10 10
GND
PCB 9 9 8 8
PSU100U_DC4
DC4-08900-50
or CN202 XH
+12V
1 1 6 6 P72
PCB 2 2
+12V
4 4
+12V
PSU200E_DC43 3
GND
2 2
4 4 23 23
GND P51A
DC4-Y8900-50 5 5
GND
21 21 SHD SHD P4 P60
6 6 19 19 +12VB
+5V 1 1 1 1
7 7 17 17 +12VB
+5V 2 2 2 2
160x197 8 8 15 15 +12VB
GND 3 3 3 3
9 9 13 13 +12VB
GND 4 4 4 4 P3 8 2
10 10 11 11 +24VA BL INVERTER
+3VA 5 5 5 5
11 11 9 9 +24VA
+3VA 6 6
+3V
6 6 Z07-94569-00
12 12 7 7 7 7 7 7
FUSER GND +3V P43 4
13 13 5 5 8 8 8 8
GND PSKEY
HEATER (100V) 14 14
GND
3 3 9 9 9 9 TOUCH PANEL
15 15 1 1 GND
ZA1-03615-80 10 10 10 10 FPC
SUBSW
11 11 11 11
12 12
GND
12 12
P12 40 LCD MODULE
GND
CN101
13 13
GND
13 13 PCB 8.5inch
Thermostat 12 14 14 14 14 FFC
ZA1-03645-60 12 15 15
RXSIG
15 15 PANEL Color TFT LCD
GND
16 16
PSLED
16 16 Z07-94571-00
Fuse 17 17 17 17
1 1
18 18
MUTE_MAIN
18 18
DC1-08021-50
Z90-48827-00 BUZZ_MAIN
19 19 19 19 P2 2
+3VZ
DC4-08560-50 20 20 20 20
2 2 ASSY SPEAKER
200x132
PH PH
P59 20 PCB
P5B P6
PH 1 1
NC
1 1
PANEL KEY1
P13 VBUS
CT
/TRYS 2 2 2 2 P52 30 DC1-08030-50
1 1 D-
TRAYS GND 1 1 3 3 3 3 123x137
2 2 2 2 D+
Z08-05572-00 +5V 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 GND
5 5 5 5
F.G
6 6 6 6
(USB)
PCB PCB
CT 18
/PSS P51
1 1 4 4 PANEL KEY2
PSS
2 2
GND
5 5 MAIN
Z08-05572-00 +5V PH P70 DC1-08040-50

3 3 6 6
1 1
36.8x137
CZ 51006(molex)
TRYCL 1 1 1
+24VC
7 7 DC4-08010-50 2 2
P71
3 3
2 2 2
Z90-56069-00 /TRYCL 4 4
3 3 8 8
PH 5 5 USB
P51B
TR +24VC VBUS (host)
1 1
270.5x220
PANEL / DC41020010
PFCL 2 1
/PFCL 9 9 2 2
D-
Z90-48683-00 1 2 10 10 D+
3 3
GND
CZ 51006(molex) +24VC 4 4 PH
1 1 11 11 F.G P9
RESCL 1 5 5
(USB)
2 2
Z90-56069-00 2 /RESCL 1 1 P10
3 3 12 12
2 2 USB
PCB ERS LAMP PH TR 13 13 3 3
1 1 1 2
+24VC 4 4 (host)
14 14
DA7-08170-50 2 2 2 1
/ERS
15 15 5 5
10x236 P5A P1
SHD SHD
+3VA
1 1 1 1
+3VA
2 2 +5V 2 2
3 3 3 3
+5V
4 4 4 4
+3VZ
5 5 /SRES1 5 5 P2 4
CT PH P14 6 6 6 6
GND TOUCH PANEL
11 /OPEN1 7 7 7 7
OPEN1 1 1 GND FPC
22 GND 8 8 8 8
2 2 GND
Z08-05572-00 33 +5V 9 9
LD7
9 9 P7 2
3 3 10 10 LD6 10 10 LCD MODULE
11 11 11 11
CT LD5 for back light 5.7inch
/PES1 12 12 LD4 12 12
PES1 1 1 4 4 P8
2 2 GND 13 13 LD3 13 13 12 B/W STN LCD
5 5 14 14 14 14
Z08-05572-00 3 3 +5V
6 6 LD2 Z90-54610-00
15 15 LD1 15 15 control
16 16 16 16
LD0
PH 17 17 17 17
TS1 (PCB TOS)1 1 +5V 7 7 18 18
/PIOR
18 18
PCB
TS1 /PIOW
D88-09060-50 23 2
3 GND
8 8
9 9
19 19
/CSKEY 19 19 PANEL B/W
20 20 LA3 20 20
18x51 4 4 NC 10 10 21 21 21 21
LA2
22 22
LA1 22 22 DC4-08070-50
PH 23 23 23 23
+5V GND
TS2 (PCB TOS) 1 1 11 11 24 24 24 24
TS2 TXD 200x130.6
D88-09060-50 23 2
3 GND
12 12
13 13
25 25 RXD 25 25
26 26 26 26 P3
18x51 4 4 NC 14 14 27 27
GND
PSLED 27 27
20 PCB
28 28 28 28
29 29
PSKEY
29 29
PANEL KEY1
/SUB_SW
30 30
GND 30 30 P4 30 DC1-08030-50
31 31 /PEN 31 31 123x137
32 32 32 32
BUZZ
33 33 +3V 33 33
PH PH P15 34 34 34 34
GND
/OPEN2 35 35 35 35
1 1 CSN
OPEN2
2 2 GND
1 1
2 2
36 36 DCLK 36 36 PCB
Z90-37777-50 +5V 37 37 37 37 P5 18
LCD3
PANEL KEY2
CASSETTE(2ND) / DC41240010
3 3 3 3 38 38 38 38
LCD2
39 39 LCD1 39 39 DC1-08040-50
40 40 40 40
LCD0 36.8x137
41 41 CL2 41 41
PH
/PES2 42 42 42 42
CL1
1 1 4 4 43 43 43 43
PES2 GND FLM
2 2 5 5 44 44 44 44
Z90-37777-50 +5V DON
3 3 6 6 45 45 45 45
GND P6
46 46 GND 46 46 2
47 47 47 47
PH 48 48
GND
48 48
ASSY SPEAKER
/JAMC2 +24V
JAMC2 1 1 7 7 49 49 49 49
GND GND
2 2 8 8 50 50 50 50
Z90-37777-50 +5V
MFX-2590 3 3 9 9
TR
+24VC P16 PH TR
PFCL2 2 1
PRINTER FRAME /
MFX-2570 10 10 +24VC
1 2 /PFCL2 COUNTER
MFX-2550 Z90-48683-00 11 11 1 1 1 2
DC41050010
/COUNT
2 2
DCB-D0216-50A 2 1 Z90-35223-50
Option
2-12

2010.02.24
08-6212-
030-340-
800+
SM30B-
SRDS-G- P910 P920
TF GND
1 1
CLK+
DATA1B 2 2
1 1 CLK-
DATA10 3 3
2 2 GND
DATA1A 4 4
3 3 GND
DATA11 5 5
4 4 /STB
DATA19 6 6
5 5 GND
DATA12 7 7
6 6 /RST
DATA18 8 8
7 7 GND
DATA13 9 9
/PWRDOWN
DATA17
8 8 PCB CONN 10
GND
10
9 9 11 11
DATA14
DATA16
10 10 LPH 12
ROM SCLK
12 LED HEAD
11 11 ROM SDA
DATA15 13 13
12 12 ROM VCC
ROM_VCC 14 14
13 13 DATA15
ROM_SDA 15 15
14 14 DC4-08100-50 16 DATA16
ROM_SCLK 16
15 15 DATA14
17 17
/PWRDOWN
16 16 DATA17 Z90-66467-00
/RST 59x47 18 18
17 17 DATA13
/STB 19 19
18 18 DATA18
GND 20 20
19 19 DATA12
GND 21 21
20 20 DATA19
VDD 22 22
21 21 DATA11
VDD 23 23
22 22 DATA1A
GND 24 24
23 23 DATA10
CLK- 25 25
24 24 DATA1B
CLK+ 26 26
25 25 VDD
GND 27 27
26 26 VDD
N.C. 28 28
P1 P6A 27 27 VDD
GND N.C. 29 29
HS 30 1 28 28 30
VDD
30
GND N.C.
Z08-05572-00 29
SCKI1P
2
N.C.
29 29
28 3 30 30
3 1
1 2
2 3
CT SCKI1N
CT
27 4
GND
26 5
GND
GND
25 6
LHS
/HS
SDTI1P
24 7 EH EH
SDTI1N P91 P92
23 8 PHD GND
GND 1 1 1 1
22 9
1 1
2 2
3 3
SH +24VF
GND 1 1 2 2 2 2
P2 SH 21 10 /MTEN
20
SRGIP
11
2 2 3 3
/MLOCK
3 3 RX MOTOR
P1 P4 SRGIN 3 3 4 4 4 4
RS
19 12
4 4 MTDIR Z90-66621-00
1 30 GND 5 5 5 5
GND 18 13 5 5 MTCLK
2 29 GND 6 6 6 6
CP 17 14 6 6
3 28 SDTO1P
GND 16 15 7 7
4 27 SDTO1N
15 16 8 8
5 PHI2 26 GND
14 17 9 9
6 GND 25 GND
PHI1 13 18 10 10
7 24 SCKO1P
12 19 11 11
8 GND 23 SCKO1N P93 EH
11 20
9 TG1 22 GND 12 12
10 21 CT
/HS GND 13 13
10 21 9 22 /HP
RLED SRGOP 14 14 1 1 1 1
PCB 11
GND
20 8
SRGON
23 15 15 2 2 GND HP
12 19 7 24 LHP 2 2
+24VA GND 16 16 3 3 Z08-05572-00
CCD 13
+24VA
18 6
GND
25
17 17
3 3
14 17 5 26
DC4-08060-50 +24VA DIFCLKFP 18 18 CT

15 16 4 27 /DUPS
GND DIFCLKFN 19 19 4 4
16 15 3 28 1 1 DUPS
+5VA GND 20 20 GND
181x32 17 14 2 29 5 5 2 2
+5VA GND 21 21 LDUPS Z08-05572-00
18 13 1 30 6 6 3 3
+5VA 22 22
19 12 30FMN-BMT-A-TF(LF)(SN) (JST) 04 6232 130 015 800+(ELCO)
LHS 23 23
20 11 CT
AGND 24 24 /PDS
21 10
10V 25 25 7 7 1 1
22 9 GND PDS
8 8
23 10V
AGND
8 PCB 26 26
9 9
LPDS 2 2
3 3 Z08-05572-00
24 7
PCB
FBS / DC41010010
25
RED
AGND
6 MAIN SM
COVER-SW
26 5
27 GREEN 4
SCANNER 10 10
+24VC
1 1
AGND 11 11
Interlock24V
28 3 +24VF
29 BLUE 2 DC4-08010-50 12 12 2 2 (ASSY INTERLOCK)
30 AGND 1 DC4-08020-50 DA7-08310-40
P3 04-6232-130-015-800+ 04-6232-130-015-800+
P94
1 1
2 2
SH (ELCO) (ELCO) EH
SH DVLPTYPE1
1 1
220x55 270.5x220
PCB 2 2 DVLPTYPE2
/FLED
24VB
LPH 3 3 LFCUTDV
P9 P90
P2 P6B SHD SHD
SHD SHD SHD SHD
4 4 /FCUTDV
SHD SHD SHD SHD
1 1
2 2
SH
SH 1 1 +24VA 1 1 1 1 +1.2V 1 1
+24VA PCLK(P) 5 5 LFCUTDR
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 DC4-08080-50
PCB 3 3 +24VA 3 3 3 3 NC(PCLK_N) 3 3
+24VA GND 6 6 /FCUTDR
LED-LAMP FBS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 GND 5 5 5 5 +2.5V 5 5
111x87
GND PDATA(N) 7 7 /DRUMSET
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
DC4-08110-50 7 7 GND 7 7 7 7 NC(PDATA_P) 7 7
GND GND TR
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 P95 PH
9 9 +12VB 9 9 9 9 PTRG 9 9 +24VC
+12VB PEN 1 1 3 1 /FMLOCK 1 FAN 80mm
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 2 2 2 2
GND THTMP GND
P3 11 11
GND
11 11 11 11
+3V
11 11 3 3 1 3 3 ZA1-03792-80
EH EH EH EH 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
/MFBS_B 13 13 GND 13 13 13 13 GND 13 13
1 1 1 1 GND +3V
MFBS_B 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
2 2 2 2
FBS MOTOR 3 3
/MFBS_A
3 3 15 15 GND 15 15 15 15 /RESET 15 15
MFBS_A 16 16 GND 16 16 16 16 FPGACLKE 16 16 P96 PH TR
4 4 4 4
17 17 +5VA 17 17 17 17 GND 17 17 1 1
+3V
1 2
Fusing thermistor
+5VA +5V THTMP
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 2 2 2 1 Z90-55856-00
19 19 GND 19 19 19 19 +5V 19 19
20 20 GND 20 20 20 20 +5V 20 20
21 21 +3VB 21 21 21 21 /TOP 21 21
22 22 +3VB 22 22 22 22 GND 22 22 P97 PH
23 23 +3VB 23 23 23 23 GND 23 23 MDUP_A
GND SCLK 1 1 1
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 MDUP_B
GND STXD 2 2 2
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 /MDUP_A DUP MOTOR
GND SRXD 3 3 3
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 /MDUP_B
/RST /WR_FPGA 4 4
+24VF
4 ZA1-03598-10
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 5 5 5
28 28 /INT0022F 28 28 28 28 /INT_FPGA 28 28 +24VF
SCNPWRE3 /CS_FPGA 6 6 6
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 GND 30 30 30 30 GND 30 30
31 31 +24VC 31 31
32 32 +24VC 32 32
+24VC P98 PH CT
33 33 33 33 /JAMC1
+24VC 1 1 1 1 JAMC1
34 34 34 34 GND
GND 2 2 2 2
35 35 35 35 LJAMC1 Z08-05572-00
GND 3 3 3 3
36 36 36 36
GND 4 4
37 37 37 37
38 38 GND 38 38
39 39 +24VF 39 39
40 40 GND 40 40 P99 PH
/MSHT_A 1
1 1
MSHT_B 2
2 2 SHIFT MOTOR
MSHT_A 3
3 3
/MSHT_B 4
4 4
+24VC 5 ZA1-03791-60
MFX-2590 5 5
MFX-2570
2-13

P2
P9 SHD SHD
AD26
SHD SHD 2010.02.24
1 1 1 1
AD25
2 2 2 2
AD24
3 3 3 3
AD23
4 4 4 4
AD22
5 5 5 5
AD21
6 6 6 6
AD20 DS3
7 7 7 7
AD19
8 8
AD18
8 8 DC1-08130-5*
9 9 9 9
GND
1 1
2 2
3 3
PH
10 10 10 10
AD17 PH
11 11 11 11
AD16
12 12 12 12
LDS3
GND
AD15
/DS3
13 13 13 13
AD14
14 14 14 14
AD13
15 15 15 15
AD12
1 1
2 2
3 3
16 16 16 16 SH
AD11 SH
17 17 17 17
AD10
18 18 18 18
GND P3 P1 P2
19 19 19 19
AD9 RS
20 20 20 20 1 1 1 1
AD8 GND
21 21 21 21 2 2 2 2
AD7 CP
22 22 22 22 3 3 3 3
AD6 GND
23 23 23 23 4 4 4 4
AD5 PHI2
24 24 24 24 5 5 5 5
AD4 GND
25 25 25 25 6 6 6 6
AD3 PHI1
26 26 26 26 7 7 7 7
AD2 GND
27 27 27 27 8 8 8 8
AD1 TG1
28 28 28 28 9 9 9 9
AD0 /DS3
29 29 29 29 10 10 10 10
GND RLED
30 30 30 30 11 11 11 11
P8 P1 12 12
GND
12 12 PCB
SHD SHD 501571 501571 +24VA
13 13 13 13
1 1 +24VA 1 1 PCB 14 14
+24VA
14 14
CCD
+24VA +24VA
2 2 2 2 15 15 15 15 DC4-08060-50
3 3 GND 3 3 R-SCANNER 16 16
GND
16 16
4 4 +12VB 4 4 +5VA
17 17 17 17
5 5 +12VB 5 5 18 18
+5VA
18 18
181x32
6 6 GND 6 6 DC4-08030-50 +5VA
+5VA 19 19 19 19
7 7 7 7 LDS3
+5VA 20 20 20 20
8 8 8 8 AGND
GND 21 21 21 21
9 9 9 9 10V
+3VB 22 22 22 22
10 10 10 10 90x56.3 23 23
10V
23 23
11 11 +3VB 11 11 AGND
GND 24 24 24 24
12 12 12 12 RED
MCLK 25 25 25 25
13 13 13 13 AGND
GND 26 26 26 26
14 14 14 14 GREEN
SHD 27 27 27 27
15 15 15 15 AGND
GND 28 28 28 28
16 16 16 16 BLUE
SHP 29 29 29 29
17 17 17 17 AGND
GND 30 30 30 30
18 18 18 18 30FMN-STRK(JST) P3
19 19 LCLP1
04-6232-130-015-800
19 19 (ELCO)
20 20 LCLP2
1 1
2 2
20 20 SH
21 21 /AGC_ON 21 21 SH
/RST
PCB 22 22 22 22
23 23 AKCLK 23 23
+24VA
/RLED
RADF 24 24 AKDIN 24 24
25 25 /AKENB 25 25
26 26 AKDO 26 26
DC4-08040-50 27 27 GND
1 1
2 2
SH
27 27
P7 28 28 RS 28 28 SH
29 29 GND 29 29 PCB
DF11 DF11
P1 30 30 CP 30 30
1 1 GND LED-LAMP
DF11 DF11 206.5x66
(FG) 31 31 31 31
2 2
SCKI1P 1 1 32 32 PHI1 32 32
DC4-08120-50
3 3 GND
SCKI1N 2 2 33 33 33 33
4 4 PHI2
SDTI1P 3 3 34 34 34 34 P4
5 5 GND
SDTI1N 4 4 35 35 35 35 SH SH CT CT
6 6 TG1
SRGIP 5 5 36 36 36 36
7 7 DRS 1 1 /DRS 1 1
8 8
SRGIN
6 6
37 37
RLED
37 37
GND DRS
SCKO1P 38 38 38 38 2 2 2 2
9 9 7 7 /DS3 3 3 LDRS 3 3 Z08-05572-00
SCKO1N 8 8 39 39 39 39
10 10 LDS3
SDTO1P 9 9 40 40 40 40
PCB 11 11
12 12
SDTO1N 10 10
ADF / DC41000010
SRGOP 11 11
MAIN 13 13
14 14
SRGON
12 12
P3 EH EH
/MADF_B
EH EH
DIFCLKRP 13 13 1 1 1 1
15 15 MADF_B
DIFCLKRN 14 14 2 2 2 2
16 16 /MADF_A ADF MOTOR
DC4-08010-50 3 3
MADF_A
3 3
4 4 4 4
P83 P2 P7 PH PH
DF11 DF11 DF11 DF11 1 1 +24VA

1 2 DCLCRE
270.5x220 1 1
+24VA
1 1 2 2 R_CLUTCH
2 1 Z90-63337-00
+24VA
2 2 +24VA 2 2
3 3 GND 3 3
4 4 GND 4 4
+24VA
5 5 GND 5 5 3 3
S_CLUTCH 1 2 DCLCSE
6 6 6 6 4 4 2 1 Z90-63337-00
GND
7 7 /MADF_B 7 7
8 8 MADF_B 8 8
9 9 /MADF_A 9 9 CT CT
10 10 10 10 /TXIL
MADF_A 5 5 1 1
11 11 11 11 GND TXIL
+12VB 6 6 2 2
12 12 12 12 LTXIL Z08-05572-00
GND 7 7 3 3
13 13 13 13
GND ORANGE
14 14 GND 14 14
15 15 +5VA 15 15
CT CT
16 16 +5VA 16 16 /DS1
17 17 17 17 8 8 GND 1 1 DS1
GND
18 18 18 18 9 9 LDS1 2 2
19 19
GND
19 19 1010 3 3 Z08-05572-00
/APS BLUE
20 20 /DS1 20 20
21 21 21 21 P6
/DS2 PH PH PH PH
22 22 /INT0022R 22 22 LDS2
23 23 23 23 1 1 1 1 DS2
+5VC /DS2
24 24 24 24 2 2 2 2
25 25
GND
25 25 3 3
GND
3 3 DC1-08130-5*
+3VB
26 26 +3VB 26 26
27 27 GND 27 27 P4 PH PH CT CT
28 28 N.C 28 28 /APS
29 29 29 29 1 1 1 1 APS
/RST GND
30 30 30 30 2 2 2 2
/DRS LAPS Z08-05572-00
31 31 31 31 3 3 3 3
/DS3
32 32 32 32
4 4 +24VA 1 1
1 2
5 5 /STAMP
2 1 2 2 STAMP
P82 TR
TR
/TXIL TXIL
1 1 15 1 1 2
2 2 14 2
GND
2 1
(ASSY MICRO-SW)
DA7-08340-40
PH
3 3 13 3
LDS1
1 1 DS1 (PCB SENSOR)
/DS1
4 4 12 4
GND
2 2 DA7-08180-50
5 5 11 5 3 3 46.6x8
PH
LDS2A DS2 (PCB SENSOR)
6 6 10 6 1 1
/DS2
7 7 9 7
GND
2 2 DA7-08180-50
8 8 8 8 3 3
46.6x8 MFX-2550
SMP PH
/MADF_B 1 1 1 1
9 9 7 9 MFX-2590
MADF_B 2 2 2 2 ADF MOTOR
10 10 6 10 MFX-2570
/MADF_A 3 3 3 3
11 11 5 11
MADF_A ZA1-02454-50
12 12 4 12 4 4 4 4
Option
CT
/APS
13 13 3 13 1 1 APS
GND
14 14 2 14 2 2
15 15 1 15
+5V
3 3
Z08-05572-00
2-14

2010.02.24
P4 P11
+3.3V
1 1
+3.3V
2 2
GND
3 3
Vcc
4 4
Vcc
5 5
GND
6 6
/SHTDWN
7 7
/PCIINTX
8 8
/INTB
9 9
/INTA
10 10
/INTD
11 11
/INTC
12 12
PWE1
13 13
Vcc
14 14
PCICLK_S
15 15
UNIQ
GND P6 16 16
1 1 GND
/CD1 17 17
26 26 GND
D3 18 18
2 2 PCICLK
D11 19 19
27 27 +3.3V
D4 20 20
3 3 GND P81 PH
D12 21 21
28 28 /PCIRST GND
D5 22 22 1 1
4 4 /REQ BATT
D13 23 23 2 2
29 29 /MRES
D6 24 24
5 5 PWE2
D14 25 25
30 30 /GNT
D7 26 26
6 6 PAD31
D15 27 27
31 31 GND
/CE1 28 28
7 7 PAD30
/CE2 29 29
32 32 +3.3V
A10 30 30
8 8 GND
/VS1 31 31
33 33 PAD29
/ATASEL 32 32
9 9 PAD27
/IORD 33 33
34 34 PAD28
A9 34 34
10 10 PAD25
/IOWR 35 35
35 35 PAD26
A8 36 36
11 11 Vcc
/WE 37 37
36 36 GND
A7 38 38
12 12 CBE3 P12
INTRQ 39 39 P5
PAD24
Compact Flash 37
13
VCC
37
13
40
PAD23
40
1
+3.3V
1
VCC 41 41
Memory card PAD19 +3.3V
38 38 42 42 2 2
FAX FRAME / DC41030010
A6 GND GND
14 14 43 43 3 3
ZA1-03538-50 39 /CSEL
39 44
Vcc
44 4
Vcc
4
A5 PAD21 Vcc
15 15 45 45 5 5
/VS2 PCB PAD22 GND
40 40 46 46 6 6
A4 PAD19 /SHTDWN
16
/RESET
16 IS 47 47 7
/PCIINTX
7
41 41 PAD20
A3 48 48 8 8
Vcc /INTB
17 17 49 49 9 9
IORDY DC5-08210-50 GND /INTA
42 42 50 50 10 10
A2 PAD17 /INTD
18 18 51 51 11 11
/INPACK PAD18 /INTC
43 43 204x178 52 52 12 12
A1 CBE2 PWE1
19 19 53 53 13 13
/REG PAD16 Vcc
44 44 54 54 14 14
A0
20
/DASP
20 55
/IRDY
Vcc
55 PCB 15
PCICLK_S
PCKE
15
45 45 56 56 16 16
D0
21
/PDIAG
21 57
/DEVSEL
/FRAME
57 MAIN 17
GND
GND
17
46 46 58 58 18 18
D1 GND PCICLK
22 22 59 59 19 19
D8 /TRDY +3.3V
47 47 60 60 20 20
D2 /SDWRDY GND
DC4-08010-50
FAX FRAME / DC41030010

23 23 61 61 21 21
D9 /STOP /PCIRST
48 48 62 62 22 22
/IOIS16 Vcc /REQ
24 24 63 63 23 23
D10 Vcc /MRES
49 49 64 64 24 24
CD2 /PERR PWE2
25 25 65 65 25 25
GND GND /GNT
50 50 66 66 26 26
67
/SERR
67 270.5x220 27
PAD31
27
PAR GND
68 68 28 28
GND PAD30
69 69 29 29
P7 PAD15 +3.3V
70 70 30 30
CBE1 GND
71 71 31 31
PAD29
RJ45 72
PAD14
PAD12
72 32
PAD27
32
73 73 33 33
PAD13 PAD28
74 74 34 34
PAD11 PAD25
75 75 35 35
GND PAD26
76 76 36 36
PAD10 Vcc
77 77 37 37
PAD9 GND
78 78 38 38
GND CBE3
79 79 39 39
CBE0 PAD24
80 80 40 40
PAD8 PAD23
81 81 41 41
Vcc IDSEL
82 82 42 42
PAD7 GND
83 83 43 43
84
PAD6
84 44
Vcc
44
[OP-700]
PAD5 PAD21
85 85 45 45
PAD4 PAD22
86 86 46 46
87
PAD3
87 47
PAD19
PAD20
47 PCB
GND 48 48
88 88
89
GND
89 49
Vcc
49
ASSY PDL
PAD2 GND
90 90 50 50
PAD1 PAD17
91 91 51 51
PAD0 PAD18
92 92 52 52 DC6-08011-40
IDSEL_S CBE2
93 93 53 53
/REQ_S PAD16
94 94 54 54
95
/GNT_S
95 55
/IRDY
55 176x90
NMI Vcc
96 96 56 56
UNIQ /DEVSEL
97 97 57 57
+24VC /FRAME
98 98 58 58
+24VC GND
99 99 59 59
GND /TRDY IC4
100 100 60 60
/SDWRDY
61 61
(B to B) /STOP
62 62 1 1
Vcc
63 63 2 2
Vcc
64 64 3 3 Enabler
/PERR
65 65 4 4
GND
66 66 5 5
/SERR
67
PAR
67 6 6 Z90-65708-00
68 68 7 7
GND
69 69 8 8
PAD15
70 70
CBE1
71 71
PAD14
72 72
PAD12
Option 73 73
PAD13
74 74
PAD11
75 75
GND
76 76
PAD10
77 77
PAD9
78 78
GND
79 79
CBE0
80 80 P2
PAD8
81 81
Vcc
82 82
PAD7
83 83
PAD6
84 84
PAD5 Compact Flash
85 85
PAD4
86
PAD3
86 Memory card
87 87
GND ZA1-03537-30
88 88
GND
89 89
PAD2
90 90
PAD1
91 91
PAD0
92 92
IDSEL_S
93 93
/REQ_S
94 94
/GNT_S
95 95
UNIQ
96 96
CHKR
97 97
+12V
98 98
+12V
99 99
GND
100 100
(B to B)
2-15

2010.02.24
PHD PHD P4
+24VA
1 1 1 1
LINE DP
2 2 2 2
+24VA
3 3 3 3
CML
4 4 4 4
GND
5 5 5 5
L
PCB 6 6
GND
6 6
TEL1 7 7 7 7
NCU 8 8
H
+5VC
8 8
9 9 9 9
S
10 10 10 10
+5VC
TEL2
(EUR) 11 11
RI
11 11
12 12 12 12
DA7-Y8040-50 13 13 RXA
13 13
CONT24
or 14 14
+12VA
14 14
FAX FRAME/ DC41030010
15 15 15 15
(USA) 16 16
/OH1
16 16 PCB
TXA
DA7-08040-50 17 17 /OH2
17 17
18 18
GND
18 18
19 19
MAIN
19 19
75x140 20 20
/CI
20 20
AREF
21 21 21 21
22 22
/DSE2
22 22 DC4-08010-50
CNG
23 23 23 23
/DSE1
24 24 24 24
GND
25 25 25 25
NC
26 26 26 26
270.5x220
EH
P19
SET
1 1 GND 1 1
2 FDI 2 C(K)DRIVE 2 2
3 3 +24VC 3 3
4 1-480425-0 4 4 4
Option
P2
USB
2-16

2.5 Circuit board constructions
MFX-2570
PCB MAIN MAIN
PCB LPH
PCB ASSY PDL MOTOR
Motor Driver SHIFT
PCB IS Motor Driver DUPLEX

DFX336
PCB NCU
MODEM
PRINTER
USB UNIT
HOST FPGA PCB
LPH I/F CONN
LPH LPH
PCB PANEL
PCI Bus
PANEL
BW LCD
SPEAKER Audio
MD0021 SYSTEM ASIC
PCB RADF PCB
COMM PRINTER Motor Driver LED-LAMP
System Bus
Enc./Dec. RES.CONV
RES.CONV Layout/Dec.
SH7203 MD0022 PCB PCB CCD
CPU Ni-MH battery IMAGE R-SCANNER
Color
COUNTER PROCESSING AFE CCD
FLASH ROM DDR SDRAM
128Mb (*1)
HIGH VOLTAGE PCI I/F DDR SDRAM 128MB DDR 64MBx3 STAMPER
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL
+DMAC ADF
SDRAM MOTOR
64x2Mb PCB SCANNER
SYS DMAC
Motor Driver FBS
Heater MOTOR
SRAM (*2)
LAMP 1Mb MD0022 I/F AFE
SYS I/F PCB CCD
MD0022 Color
IMAGE IMAGE CCD
Lithium battery USB Func PROCESSING
PROCESSING
POWER Layout/Enc.
SUPPLY PCB
DDR 64MBx3
LED-LAMP
(*1) Connected to the Ni-MH battery
(*2) Connected to the Lithium battery
MFX-2550
PCB MAIN
PCB PDL
PCB LPH MAIN
MOTOR
PCB IS Motor Driver DUPLEX

DFX336
PCB NCU
MODEM
PRINTER
USB UNIT
HOST FPGA PCB
LPH I/F CONN
LPH LPH
PCB PANEL
PCI Bus
PANEL
BW LCD
ADF
SPEAKER Audio UNIT
MD0021 SYSTEM ASIC
COMM PRINTER ADF
Motor Driver
System Bus
Enc./Dec. RES.CONV MOTOR

RES.CONV Layout/Dec.
SH7203
CPU Ni-MH battery
COUNTER
FLASH ROM DDR SDRAM
128Mb (*1)
HIGH VOLTAGE PCI I/F DDR SDRAM 128MB
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL PCB SCANNER
+DMAC
SDRAM Motor Driver FBS
64x2Mb MOTOR
SYS DMAC
AFE
PCB CCD
Heater SRAM (*2) MD0022
LAMP Color
1Mb MD0022 I/F IMAGE CCD
SYS I/F PROCESSING
Lithium battery IMAGE DDR 64MBx3 PCB

USB Func PROCESSING
POWER LED-LAMP
Layout/Enc.
SUPPLY
(*1) Connected to the Ni-MH battery

(*2) Connected to the Lithium battery
2-17

Main control board
This board controls the MFP system. By inserting the USB memory stick, firmware can be updated.
The main devices mounted on the main control board and their functions are as follows:
CPU This performs the firmware.
This controls the high voltage power board.
MD0021 This controls the memory.
This controls the scanner motor.
This edits the image such as rotation, mirroring, or n-in-1.
This transfers the serial image date to LPH board.
This performs the USB functions.
Modem This has G3 and Super G3 communication function.
Memory section FLASH memory
• The FLASH memory stores program data, background level data, and other
parameters.
SRAM
• The SRAM stores user registered data. It is backed up by a lithium battery.
• The data will be cleared by removing the jumper pin JP2.
SDRAM
• The SDRAM is for following use. It is backed up by a Ni-MH battery on the
main control board:
1) Stores program data; When the machine is turned on, CPU op-
eration data is copied from FLASH memory on SDRAM, and then
executed from the SDRAM.
2) S tores encoded image data.
3) W orks as temporary communication memory.
USB controller This controls the USB HOST function.
Scanner board
It detects the FBS sensor signal.
It controls the motor drivers.
It drives the FBS motor.
It controls the CCD.
It offsets the image signal (analogue signal) from the CCD, then adjusts gain, converts AD, and pro-
cesses the image data.
When MD 0022 has processed color or monochrome image, it codes the data and transmits to the
main control board.
RADF board
It detects the DADF sensor signals.
It controls the CCD.
When MD 0022 has processed color or monochrome image, it codes the data and transmits to the
main control board.
R-Scanner board
It offsets the image signal (analogue signal) from the CCD, then adjusts gain, converts AD, and pro
cesses the image data.
CCD board
This board is mounted with color 600dpi CCD for letter-size.
The CCD device scans the document, and transmits the image data signal (analog signal) to scanner
board.
2-18

LPH (LED Printer Head) board / LPH connection board
It detects the printer sensor signal.
It controls the clutches.
It converts the print serial data received from main control board to a data format for the LED head,
then transmits it to the LED.
It reads the LED individual difference correction data, and adjust the print density.
Panel board
This is a key input board that equips 5.7 inch monochrome LCD.
It controls the panel key and LCD touch key.
Network board
This controls the network interface.
It has the OfficeBridge function.
Printer Description Language (PDL) board

This rasterizes print data transmitted from the computer, as the main control board cannot do it.
Low-voltage power board

It consists of four blocks: primary control, secondary control, heater control, and flicker control.
The secondary output voltages are +24.0 VDC, +12.0 VDC, +5.0 VDC, and +3.3 VDC. The +24.0
VDC is for transformer control, +12.0 VDC, +5.0 VDC, and +3.3 VDC are for DC/DC control.
AC inputs is turned off and on by an AC switch at an inlet.
It equips an overvoltage and overcurrent protection circuit.
It equips a heater driving circuit for the fuser.
Output is 750 W / 100VAC.
OUTPUT CN201
CONTOL
P-CON 1
INLET DC/DC +12V
HC1 2
SW
HC2 3
L FUSE F1
RECTIFIVATION / RECTIFIVATION / +24. 0V
LINE FILTER FUSE F201 4
N LEVEL LEVEL
5
6
FUSE F202 7
CONTOL
8
+24V
9
HEATER
CONTOL 1
P- CON
CONTOL IC OUTPUT CN202

CONTOL +12. 0V FUSE F203
1
HEATER DC/DC +12V
CONTOL 2 2
FUSE F101 CN 101 3
OUTPUT HEATER CN101 CONTOL +5. 0V

7
DC/DC +5V
8
PC1A
CONTOL +3. 3V
DC/DC +3V 11
12
PC2A
4
5
6
9
10
PT102 13
HC1 14
15
PT101
HC2
2-19

High-voltage power board
This board generates high-voltage power required for electrophotographic system ; charge, develop-
ing, transfer, and cleaning sections.
In charging section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the wire in the drum unit in order
to charge the drum surface positive. It monitors the charge condition through the wire condition. Also it
charges the mesh grid electrode at the opening of charger in order to make the drum charge potential
even.
In developing section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the developing roller and supply
roller in the developing unit in order to transfer the toner in the developing unit to the drum. The con-
trol of output voltage is made by an analogue signal.
In transfer section, it generates negative voltage which is applied to the transfer roller in order to trans-
fer the toner on the drum to paper. The control of output voltage is made by an analogue signal. Also
generates positive voltage when cleaning the transfer roller.
In cleaning section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the cleaning roller and cleaning
shaft in order to collect paper dust on the drum.
Network Control Unit (NCU) board

The NCU board provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring
signal detector and telephone control circuit.
Major components of the NCU
DP relay
Connects the telephone line to the fax.
S relay
Used to connect the telephone line at seizure state.
OH & Tone detector
Detects the On-hook condition of the Phone 1 and Phone 2.
H relay
Disconnects the Phone 1 and Phone 2 line from PSTN.
24V generator
Supplies 24 volts to the relays for OH detection of Phone 1 or Phone 2.
Ring signal detector
A photo coupler that detects an incoming ring.
2-20

2.6 Sensors
2.6.1 Sensor Locations
The following illustration shows the relative positions of the machine’s sensors.
HS
PES1
TS2
TS1
JAMC2
OPEN2
PES2
APS DRS *
DS3 *
DS2
Shift *
DS1
COVER-SW TXIL
PDS DPS
JAMC1
PSS
Thermistor
OPEN1
TRAYS
*: MFX-2570 only.
2-21

2.6.2 Sensor Descriptions
The following table gives a brief description of each sensor and its function.
Code Name Detects Sensor Type
DS1 Document sensor 1 Presence of document in feeder Photo interrupter
DS2 Document sensor 2 Leading and trailing edge of Reflector (MFX-2570)
document Photo interrupter (MFX-
2550)
DS3 Document sensor 3 Leading edge of document on Reflector
back side.
MFX-2570 only.
DRS Document register sen- Leading edge of document. Photo interrupter
sor MFX-2570 only.
APS ADF permit sensor Platen cover quite close or not Photo interrupter
HS Mirror carriage home Mirror carriage position Photo interrupter
position sensor
TXIL Interlock switch Scanner cover open or close Mechanical Switch
COVER Cover switch Detects front cover and the first Mechanical Switch
cassette jam access cover are
open or close
PDS Paper discharge sensor Detects paper pass at paper exit Photo interrupter
DPS Duplex paper sensor Detects paper pass of the duplex Photo interrupter
printing paper
OPEN1 Paper cassette open Detects the first paper cassette Photo interrupter
sensor open or close
PES1 Paper empty sensor Detects presence of recording Photo interrupter
paper in the first paper
cassette
TS1 Toner sensor 1 Detects the toner empty for small Photo interrupter
capacity toner cartridge
TS2 Toner sensor Detects the toner empty for large Photo interrupter
capacity toner cartridge
PSS Paper supply sensor Detects paper feeding out of cas- Photo interrupter
sette/tray
TRAYS Tray sensor Detects presence of recording Photo interrupter
paper in the bypass tray
JAMC1 Jam access cover sen- Detects the side cover open or Photo interrupter
sor close
Shift Shift sensor The exit roller position. Photo interrupter
MFX-2570 only.
PES2 Paper empty sensor Detects presence of recording Photo interrupter

paper in the 2nd paper cassette
OPEN2 Paper cassette open Detects the 2nd paper cassette Photo interrupter
sensor open or close
JAMC2 Jam access cover Detects the 2nd paper cassette Photo interrupter
sensor side cover open or close
2-22

2.7 Function detail and additional information
2.7.1 Port setting list
Application Detail Port name Protocol Standard port Application

number role
Info Monitor New arrival notification to Original UDP/IP 61000 Receive
InfoMonitor
New arrival inquiry from HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP 80/443 Send
InfoMonitor
User list acquisition / User HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP 80/443 Send
authentication
CoverPage Editor Cover page list acquisition HTTP TCP/IP 80 Send
Cover page data upload HTTP TCP/IP 80 Send
Scan to Print Printer registration on MFP HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP 80/443 Send
Monitor
TWAIN driver Document list data acquisi- HTTP TCP/IP 80 Send
(Network) tion
Image data download from HTTP TCP/IP 80 Send
MFP
Installer Test printing for Security LPR TCP/IP 515 Send
Print function
GDI print driver Print data transfer to MFP IPP Port IPP TCP/IP 80 Send
PCL print driver Standard Raw TCP/IP 9100 Send
PS print driver TCP/IP Port LPR TCP/IP 515 Send
XPS print driver
FAX driver Print data transfer to MFP Standard Raw TCP/IP 9100 Send
TCP/IP Port LPR TCP/IP 515 Send
Cover page list acquisition HTTP TCP/IP 80 Send
FAX location acquisition / HTTP TCP/IP 80 Send
designation
PDF Direct Print Print data transfer to MFP LPR TCP/IP 515 Send
XPS Direct Print
Used in common User list acquisition / User HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP 80/443 Send
by print driver, Fax authentication
driver, and installer
Used in common Server (MFP) search Original UDP/IP 61000 Send/
by InfoMonitor, Receive
CoverPage Editor,
Scan to Print
Monitor, TWAIN
driver and installer
2-23

3 Adjustment Procedures
3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The fax machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below
along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description.
When you press “ * ”, you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there is no prob-
lem.
Service Program Explanation Operation Page
Machine Parameters Used to set or clear machine parameters. <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0> 3-3
Memory Switch Used to set or clear memory switches <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1> 3-28
User data clear This mode clears user programmed informa- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2> 3-86
tion.
All RAM clear This mode clears all backup data to initialize <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3> 3-86
the machine.
Unique Switches These switches are used to program internal <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <4> 3-58
machine parameters.
T30 Monitor The communications on the journal list are <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <5> 3-87
able to print.
Printer maintenance Shows the error code for "Checkout error" <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6> 3-90
mode errors.
Service Report Print- You can print out a report that contains ma- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <7> 3-93
ing chine’s usage and error history.
Monitor speaker If you need to monitor the signal of fax com- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8> 3-98
munication, turn this mode on.
Test Modes This mode offers the ability to print a test <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9> 3-98
pattern and monitor certain unit output func-
tions. Included are followings.
1. Life monitor
2. Printer test
3. Feeder test
4. Set background level
5. Make Color Gamma
6. Select Color Gamma
Print parameter This function instructs the unit to print a list <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0> 3-104
settings of the machine parameter, memory switch
and unique switch settings.
Factory functions Allows to perform a series of diagnostic <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1> 3-104
tests:
1. LED test
2. LCD test
3. Panel test
4. SRAM check
5. DRAM check
6. RTC test
7. Page memory check
8. Pseudo ring test
9. Serial number writing
Line tests This mode offers several internal tests and <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2> 3-109
ability to monitor certain unit output func-
tions.
1. Relay test
2. Tonal signal test
3. DTMF output test
Mirror carriage trans- This mode moves the mirror carriage to the <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4> 3-112
fer mode transport position.
Consumable order Used to set or clear the consumable order <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5> 3-113
sheet sheet.
DRAM clear This clears the image storage memory. <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6> 3-119
3-1

Service Program Explanation Operation Page
Life monitor Use this mode to clear the resettable counter <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0> 3-119
maintenance or reenter the life monitor.
Sensor input test This mode enables to confirm the sensor <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> 3-121
status.
Printer diagnostic This mode enables to confirm the operation <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3> 3-122
mode of the printer parts.
Network service mode Used to clear administrator's password and <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4> 3-123
initialize authentication method.
Flash ROM Sum This mode enables to check Sum after the <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9> 3-124
check Flash ROM version is updated.
Set service report Used to enter location where to send the ser- <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <2> 3-124
vice report.
Printer registration This mode adjusts the print position. <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> 3-126
adjustment
Reset printer trouble This mode clears the service call. Clear the <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <5> 3-127
warning when the trouble is settled.
Cleaning mode This mode rotate the Pickup roller and reg- <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <6> 3-127
istration roller automatically so that you can
clean the surface of them.
Key Counter This function is for "Foreign Device Interface" <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <0> 3-128
option). If you have attached the key counter
to the machine activate this mode to let it
count the printed-paper.
Network switch mode Adjust the network parameter. <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <1> 3-128
Touch Panel Adjust- Correct the X, Y on the touch panel. <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <6> 3-133
ment
Printer control param- Adjust functions of print controller. <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <7> 3-133
eter mode
Network Capture You can capture the packet data the ma- <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <8> 3-136
chine has sent and received, and download
it from the web browser or sent it to an e-mail
address.
Storage Maintenance This mode is used to erase or initialize the <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9> 3-139
Compact Flash (CF) memory card on Office-
Bridge.
Coverage Rate You can set the toner coverage rate of pa- <Setting>, <*>, <6>, <0> 3-141
per. This will be the base to calculate the
toner consumption of the users.
Service function menu All the field service program modes are avail- <Setting>, <*>, <7>, <7> 3-141
able from the menu.
Wire cleaning warning This mode makes to display the cleaning <Setting>, <*>, <8>, <6> 3-142
warning for drum charge wire and print head
in a certain interval.
Installing language You can install, edit or delete languages <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <1> 3-142
on the machine that is prepared in an USB
memory.
Counter Information This mode is used to correct the counter <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <3> 3-143
Maintenance data on SRAM (main control panel) and CF
memory card.
Asset Number This mode is used to input the asset number. <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <5> 3-143
Update the software Update main ROM, optional print controller <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8> 3-144
ROM and network board ROM using this
mode.
Quick initial settings You can do the following setting with continu- <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9> 3-144
ously:
1. Initial settings
2. Consumable order sheet
3-2

3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment
3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery main-
tains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>.

2. Press [Edit Parameters].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ] or [ ] , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired parameter by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:

• The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).
• Press [ ] or [ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor.
• Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ], to change the bit value.
• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine pa-
rameter edit screen.
• Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.
6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready screen.
You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List.
The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing [List Parameter].
3-3

3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters
Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults.

2. Press [Clear Parameters].
3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults.
Adjustable items :
Adujstment Parameter
• Image data output level (Data attenuation) 001
• ADF Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal direction) : MFX-2550 010
• ADF Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal direction) : MFX-2550 011
• ADF Elastic rate adjustment (Vertical direction) : MFX-2550 012
• ADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction) : MFX-2550 013
• ADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction) : MFX-2550 014
• FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal direction) 015
• FBS Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal direction) 016
• FBS Elastic rate adjustment (Vertical direction) 017
• FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction) 018
• Mirror carriage standby position adjustment 020
• Mirror carriage transfer mode position adjustment 021
• Set lamp type of DADF 022
• Stamp time 024
• Background level adjustment position 025
• DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal) : MFX-2570 /Back 030
• DADF Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal) : MFX-2570 /Back 031
• DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical) : MFX-2570 /Back 033
• DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical) : MFX-2570 /Back 034
• DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal) : MFX-2570 /Front 035
• DADF Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal) : MFX-2570 /Front 036
• DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical) : MFX-2570 /Front 038
• DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical) : MFX-2570 /Front 039
Additional steps for fax scanning
• ADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction) : MFX-2550 043
• DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction): MFX-2570/ Back 044
• FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction) 045
• ADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction): MFX-2550 046
• DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction): MFX-2570/ Back 047
• DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction): MFX-2570/ Front 048
• DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction): MFX-2570/ Front 049
• Offset of Gamma Parameter (Frontside, Text/Text&Photo/Photo) 050
• Offset of Gamma Parameter (Backside, Text/Text&Photo/Photo) 052
• Offset of Gamma Parameter (Frontside, additional steps for Text) 053
• Offset of Gamma Parameter (Backside, additional steps for Text) 055
• Protect duplex printing for cassette 1 / cassette 2/ bypass tray / duplex unit 092
• Paper loop volume adjustment 260
• Current adjustment (Half-letter size plain paper) 280
• Current adjustment (Envelop) 281
• Current adjustment (Postcard) 282
• Current adjustment (Letter and Legal plain paper - front side) 285
• Current adjustment (OHP) 288
• Current adjustment (Letter and Legal plain paper - back side) 289
3-4

Machine Parameter 000 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 001

Initial
bit Adjust Usage / Comments
Setting
7 0 Factory use only -
3 0 Adjust the attenuation level for image data signal output.
2 0
1 0 bit 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 Memory switch 11 is active
0 0 0 1
: Do not set
0 1 1 1
Image data output level 1 0 0 0 -8.0 dB
(Data attenuation) 1 0 0 1 -9.0 dB
0 0 1 0 1 0 -10.0 dB
1 0 1 1 -11.0 dB
1 1 0 0 -12.0 dB
1 1 0 1 -13.0 dB
1 1 1 0 -14.0 dB
1 1 1 1 -15.0 dB
Machine Parameter 002 ~ 009 — Factory use only

Switch Initial
Adjust Usage/Comments
Setting
7 0 For MFX-2550 bit 76543210
6 0 25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm
5 0 ADF scanner registration :
4 0 adjustment (Horizontal) 00010000 +3.39 mm
:
3 0
Adjusts the start point to 00001000 +1.69 mm
2 0 scan the document. :
1 0 The plus setting increases 00000000 0 mm
0 1 the left margin and the minus :
setting decreases it. 10001000 -1.69 mm
:
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi 10010000 -3.39 mm
(0.2117 mm) :
-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm
3-5

Initial
Switch Adjust Usage/Comments
Setting
7 0 For MFX-2550
6 0 bit 76543210
5 0 Adjustment of the scanning 01111111 +1.27%
4 0 stretching and squeezing for :
ADF. 00010000 +0.16%
3 0
(Horizontal) :
2 0 00000100 +0.04%
1 0 The plus setting stretches the :
0 0 image data and the 00000000 0%
minus setting squeezes it. :
10000100 -0.04%
Each setting changes by :
0.01% 10010000 -0.16%
:
11111111 -1.27%

Initial
Setting
7 0 For MFX-2550 Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0
5 0 Adjustment of the scanning bit 76543210
4 0 stretching and squeezing for 01111111 +1.27%
ADF. :
3 0 00010000 +0.16%
(Vertical)
2 0 :
1 0 The plus setting squeezes 00000100 +0.04%
0 0 the image data and the :
minus setting stretches it. 00000000 0%
:
Each setting changes by 10000100 -0.04%
0.01% :
10010000 -0.16%
:
11111111 -1.27%
3-6

Initial
Setting
6 0
5 0 Leading edge document 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 0 margin adjustment (ADF) :
00100000 +2.71 mm
3 1
Adjusts the leading edge :
2 0 margin from Document 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start :
0 1 of scanning the position. 00001000 +0.68mm
:
00000000
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
100111111 -5.34 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
For fax mode, add the value of machine parameter

043 to this adjustment.

Initial
Setting
1 For MFX-2550 Switch 76543210 Settings
7
6 0 Trailing edge document 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 0 00100000 +2.71 mm
Adjusts document feed after :
3 1
the trailing edge of a docu- 00010000 +1.36 mm
2 0 ment passes Document :
1 0 Sensor 2 (DS2). 00010011 +0.93 mm
0 0 :
00001000 +0.68mm
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 00000000
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-7

Initial
Setting
7 0 FBS scanner registration Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 adjustment (Horizontal)
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 0 Adjusts the start point to :
scan the document. 00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
The plus setting increases :
2 0 the left margin and the minus 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 1 setting decreases it. :
0 1 00001000 +0.68mm
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 00000000 0 mm
:
10000010 -0.17 mm
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjustment of the scanning Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 stretching and squeezing for
5 0 FBS. bit 76543210
4 0 (Horizontal) 01111111 +1.27%
:
3 0 00010000 +0.16%
The plus setting stretches
1 0 minus setting squeezes it. 00000100 +0.04%
0 0 :
Each setting changes by 00000000 0%
0.1% :
10000100 -0.04%
:
10010000 -0.16%
:
11111111 -1.27%
3-8

Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjustment of the scanning Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 stretching and squeezing for
5 1 FBS. bit 76543210
(Vertical) 01111111 +1.27%
4 0
:
3 0
The plus setting squeezes 00010000 +0.16%
1 0 minus setting stretches it. 00000100 +0.04%
0 1 :
Each setting changes by 00000000 0%
0.01% :
10000100 -0.04%
:
10010000 -0.16%
:
11111111 -1.27%

Initial
Setting
7 1 Leading edge document Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 margin adjustment For FBS
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 1 Adjusts the leading edge :
margin after Home Sensor 00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
OFF to the start of scanning :
2 0 the position. 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 :
0 1 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00001000 +0.68mm
(0.0847 mm) :
00000000 0 mm
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-9

Initial
Setting
7 0 Mirror carriage standby Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 position adjustment
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 0 Adjusts the number of the :
steps from the home sensor 00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
of the mirror carriage OFF :
2 0 to the standby position. 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 :
0 0 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00001000 +0.68mm
(0.0847 mm) :
00000000 0 mm
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
After the adjustment, please adjust machine

parameter 013 and 014.

Initial
Setting
7 0 Mirror carriage transfer mode Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 position adjustment
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
3 0
2 0 to the transfer mode position. 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 :
0 0 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00001000 +0.68mm
(0.0847 mm) :
00000000 0 mm
:
10000010 -0.17 mm
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
3-10

Initial
Setting
7 1 Set lamp type of DADF When you set this switch, set the background level.
0: Lamp with 32 LED (See page 3-102.)
(8 monitoring points)
1: Lamp with 36 LED
(9 monitoring points)
6 0 Factory use only
Machine Parameter 023 --- Factory use only

Initial
Setting
7 0 Confirmation stamp time This set the time to how long the stamp solenoid is
6 0 on.
5 0 1 step = 10 msec
4 0 bit 76543210
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2550 msec
3 0
:
2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 2000 msec
1 0 :
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1500 msec
:
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1000 msec
:
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 500 msec
:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 10 msec
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 300 msec (default)
3-11

Initial
Setting
7 1 Background level adjustment Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0 starting position
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
3 0
2 0 to the background level 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 adjusting start position. :
0 1 00001000 +0.68mm
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 00000000 default position (15.35mm)
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
Machine Parameter 026 ~ 029— Factory use only
3-12

Switch Initial
Setting
7 0 For MFX-2570 bit 76543210
6 0 Back side of document 25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm
5 0 :
4 0 DADF scanner registration 00010000 +3.39 mm
adjustment (Horizontal) :
3 0
00001000 +1.69 mm
1 0 scan the document. 00000000 0 mm
0 0 The plus setting increases :
the left margin and the minus 10001000 -1.69 mm
setting decreases it. :
10010000 -3.39 mm
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi :
(0.2117 mm) -25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm

Initial
Setting
7 0 For MFX-2570
6 0 Back side of document bit 76543210
5 0 01111111 +1.27%
4 0 Adjustment of the scanning :
stretching and squeezing for 00010000 +0.16%
3 0
DADF. :
2 0 (Horizontal) 00000100 +0.04%
1 0 :
0 0 The plus setting stretches the 00000000 0%
image data and the :
minus setting squeezes it. 10000100 -0.04%
:
0.01% :
11111111 -1.27%
Machine Parameter 032— Factory use only
3-13

Initial
Setting
6 0 Back side of document
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 0 :
Leading edge document 00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
margin adjustment (ADF) :
2 0 00010000 +1.36 mm
0 0 margin from Document 00001000 +0.68mm
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start :
of scanning the position. 00000000
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
100111111 -5.34 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm


Initial
Setting
1 For MFX-2570 Switch 76543210 Settings
7 Back side of document
6 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
5 0 Trailing edge document :
4 0 margin adjustment (ADF) 00100000 +2.71 mm
:
3 1
Adjusts document feed after 00010000 +1.36 mm
2 0 the trailing edge of a docu- :
1 1 ment passes Document 00010011 +0.93 mm
0 0 Sensor 2 (DS2). :
00001000 +0.68mm
:
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00000000
(0.0847 mm) :
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-14

Switch Initial
Setting
7 0 For MFX-2570 bit 76543210
6 0 Front side of document 25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm
5 0 :
4 0 DADF scanner registration 00010000 +3.39 mm
adjustment (Horizontal) :
3 0
00001000 +1.69 mm
1 1 scan the document. 00000000 0 mm
the left margin and the minus 10001000 -1.69 mm
setting decreases it. :
10010000 -3.39 mm
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi :
(0.2117 mm) -25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm

Initial
Setting
7 0 For MFX-2570
6 0 Front side of document bit 76543210
5 0 01111111 +1.27%
4 0 Adjustment of the scanning :
stretching and squeezing for 00010000 +0.16%
3 0
DADF. :
2 0 (Horizontal) 00000100 +0.04%
1 0 :
0 0 The plus setting stretches the 00000000 0%
image data and the :
minus setting squeezes it. 10000100 -0.04%
:
0.01% :
11111111 -1.27%
3-15

Initial
Setting
6 0
5 0 Adjustment of the scanning bit 76543210
4 0 stretching and squeezing for 01111111 +1.27%
DADF. :
3 0 00010000 +0.16%
(Vertical)
2 0 :
1 0 The plus setting squeezes 00000100 +0.04%
minus setting stretches it. 00000000 0%
:
0.01% :
10010000 -0.16%
:
11111111 -1.27%

Initial
Setting
6 0 Front side of document
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 1 :
Leading edge document 00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
margin adjustment (ADF) :
2 0 00010000 +1.36 mm
0 0 margin from Document 00001000 +0.68mm
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start :
of scanning the position. 00000000
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
100111111 -5.34 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-16

Initial
Setting
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
margin adjustment (ADF) 00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
:
2 1 Adjusts document feed after 00010000 +1.36 mm
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
00001000 +0.68mm
:
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00000000
(0.0847 mm) :
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm


Initial
Setting
6 0
00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
2 1 margin from Document 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start :
0 0 of scanning the position. 00001000 +0.68mm
:
00000000
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 10001000 -0.68 mm
:
Additional steps for 10010000 -1.36 mm
FAX mode :
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
100111111 -5.34 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
Add this value to machine parameter 013. This

adjustment is for fax mode only.
3-17

Initial
Setting
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 0 Leading edge document :
margin adjustment (DADF) 00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
:
2 0 Adjusts the leading edge 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 margin from Document :
0 0 Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start 00001000 +0.68mm
of scanning the position. :
00000000
:
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 10001000 -0.68 mm
(0.0847 mm) :
10010000 -1.36 mm
Additional steps for :
FAX mode 10100000 -2.71 mm
:
100111111 -5.34 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm


Initial
Setting
6 0
4 1 margin adjustment For FBS :
00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
2 0 margin after Home Sensor 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 OFF to the start of scanning :
0 1 the position. 00001000 +0.68mm
:
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00000000 0 mm
(0.0847 mm) :
10001000 -0.68 mm
Additional steps for FAX :
mode 10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-18

Initial
Setting
6 0
5 0 Trailing edge document 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
00100000 +2.71 mm
3 0
Adjusts document feed after :
2 0 the trailing edge of a docu- 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 1 ment passes Document :
0 0 Sensor 2 (DS2). 00010011 +0.93 mm
:
00001000 +0.68mm
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi :
(0.0847 mm) 00000000
:
Additional steps for 10001000 -0.68 mm
FAX mode :
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm


Initial
Setting
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
3 0
:
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
00001000 +0.68mm
:
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00000000
(0.0847 mm) :
10001000 -0.68 mm
FAX mode 10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-19

Initial
Setting
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
4 0 Leading edge document :
3 0
:
2 0 Adjusts the leading edge 00010000 +1.36 mm
1 0 margin from Document :
0 0 Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start 00001000 +0.68mm
of scanning the position. :
00000000
:
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 10001000 -0.68 mm
(0.0847 mm) :
10010000 -1.36 mm
FAX mode 10100000 -2.71 mm
:
100111111 -5.34 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm


Initial
Setting
5 0 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm
3 1
:
Sensor 2 (DS2). :
00001000 +0.68mm
:
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi 00000000
(0.0847 mm) :
10001000 -0.68 mm
FAX mode 10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-20

Initial
Setting
7 0 Offset of Gamma Parameter Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0
5 0 Copy mode 127 steps 11111111 Darkest setting
4 0 :
ADF-frontside 126 steps 11111110
3 0
Document type: :
2 0 Text/Text&Photo/Photo 2 steps 00000010
1 0 :
0 0 1 step 00000001
:
0 step 00000000 Standard
:
-1 step 00000001
:
-2 steps 000000010
:
-126 steps 011111110
:
-127steps 01111111 Lightest setting

Initial
Setting
6 0
4 0 :
ADF-backside (for DADF) 126 steps 11111110
3 0
Document type: :
2 0 Text/Text&Photo/Photo 2 steps 00000010
1 0 :
0 0 1 step 00000001
:
:
-1 step 00000001
:
-2 steps 000000010
:
-126 steps 011111110
:
3-21

Initial
Setting
6 0
4 0 :
ADF-frontside 126 steps 11111110
3 0
Document type: Text :
2 0 2 steps 00000010
1 0 :
0 0 1 step 00000001
:
:
-1 step 00000001
:
-2 steps 000000010
:
-126 steps 011111110
:
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 050

(common steps for copy steps) and 053.
However the steps cannot exceed -127 or 127.

Initial
Setting
6 0
4 0 :
ADF-backtside (for DADF) 126 steps 11111110
3 0
Document type: Text :
2 0 2 steps 00000010
1 0 :
0 0 1 step 00000001
:
:
-1 step 00000001
:
-2 steps 000000010
:
-126 steps 011111110
:
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 052

(common steps for copy steps) and 055.
However the steps cannot exceed -127 or 127.
3-22

Initial
Setting
7 0 Able to use the bypass tray When set to “1”, the cassette or the bypass tray is
for duplex printing not available for duplex printing.
0: Yes
1: No
1 0 Able to use the second cas-
sette for duplex printing
0: Yes
1: No
0 0 Able to use the first cassette
for duplex printing
0: Yes
1: No
3-23

Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjust the loop at the synchronizing roller.
6 0 More loop will correct paper skew, but thin paper may
5 0 jam easily.
4 0 Adjust it one step at a time.
3 0
bit 43210
2 0 0 1 1 1 1 +5.0 mm
1 0 Paper loop volume 0 0 1 0 0 +4.2 mm
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 +3.4 mm
0 0 0 1 0 +1.7 mm
0 0 0 0 1 + 0.8 mm
0 0 0 0 0 No adjustment (default)
Switch bit 7 to “1” to reduce (minus) the volume.
3-24

Initial
Setting
7 0 Current adjustment When transfer problems occ��
u��
r, adjust this
��
param-
6 0 eter.
5 0 Half-letter size Switch 76543210 Settings
4 0 Plain paper
31 steps 00011111 +3.41 mA
3 0
:
2 0 8 steps 00001000 +0.88 mA
0 0 the current and the minus 00000000 0 mA  Initial setting
setting decreases it. -1 steps 10000001 -0.11 mA
-2 steps 10000010 -0.22 mA
0.11 mA. -8 steps 10001000 -0.88 mA
:
-31 steps 10011111 -3.41 mA
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,

“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
NOTE
• Adjusting them too many steps affect the print
quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps
at first.
• DO NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or
smaller than -31.

Initial
Setting
7 0 Current adjustment When transfer problems occur, adjust this
6 0 parameter.
5 0 Envelops Switch 76543210 Settings
4 0
31 steps 00011111 +3.41 mA
3 0
:
2 0 The plus setting increases 8 steps 00001000 +0.88 mA
1 0 the current and the minus :
0 0 setting decreases it. 00000000 0 mA  Initial setting
-1 steps 10000001 -0.11 mA
Each setting changes by -2 steps 10000010 -0.22 mA
0.11 mA. :
-8 steps 10001000 -0.88 mA
:
-31 steps 10011111 -3.41 mA

“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.
3-25

Initial
Setting
7 0 Current adjustment When transfer problems occur, adjust this
6 0 parameter.
5 0 Postcards Switch 76543210 Settings
4 0
31 steps 00011111 +3.41 mA
3 0
:
-1 steps 10000001 -0.11 mA
0.11 mA. :
-8 steps 10001000 -0.88 mA
:
-31 steps 10011111 -3.41 mA

“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.

Initial
Setting
u��
r, adjust this
��
param-
6 0 eter.
5 0 Letter and Legal size Switch 76543210 Settings
4 0 Plain paper front side
31 steps 00011111 +3.41 mA
3 0
:
2 0 8 steps 00001000 +0.88 mA
-2 steps 10000010 -0.22 mA
0.11 mA. -8 steps 10001000 -0.88 mA
:
-31 steps 10011111 -3.41 mA

“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.
3-26


Initial
Setting
7 0 Current adjustment When transfer problems occur, adjust
6 0 this parameter.
5 0 Transparency sheets (OHP) Switch 76543210 Settings
4 0
31 steps 00011111 +3.41 mA
3 0
:
-1 steps 10000001 -0.11 mA
0.11 mA. :
-8 steps 10001000 -0.88 mA
:
-31 steps 10011111 -3.41 mA

“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.

Initial
Setting
u��
r, adjust this
��
param-
6 0 eter.
5 0 Letter and Legal size Switch 76543210 Settings
4 0 Plain paper back side
31 steps 00011111 +3.41 mA
3 0
:
2 0 8 steps 00001000 +0.88 mA
-2 steps 10000010 -0.22 mA
0.11 mA. -8 steps 10001000 -0.88 mA
:
-31 steps 10011111 -3.41 mA

“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
NOTE
at first.
smaller than -31.
3-27

3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment
3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains
these settings if power are lost.

2. Press [Mem Switch Edit].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing or , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the memory switch settings:

• Press or of the cursor key to move the cursor.
• Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ] to change the bit value.
• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory switch
edit screen.
• Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch.
6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List.
The memory switch List will be printed by pressing [Mem Switch Print].
3-28

3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches
Resets the memory switches to factory defaults.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1>.
2. Press [Mem Switch Clear].
3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults.
Adjustable items :
000 • CED detection condition

• DIS detect time after dialing
• CED detection
• Phone line type for the first phone line
001 • DIS detection condition
• PBX mode dial pause
002 • Redial in D.0.7 error
004 • DTMF attenuation
005 • Ring signal detect time
• Number of CI signal detection in Fax / Tel Ready mode
• Dual ring detection
• Long ring detection
• Frequency of the CI signal
010 • Busy tone detection
• Fallback pattern
• Overseas mode
• V. 29 Echo Protect tone
• Maximum transmit speed
011 • Time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
• Interval between DCS and TCF
• Output attenuation
012 • TTI clock type
• TTI calendor type
• TTI transmit
• ECM response time
• ECM error retransmit time
• Interval between DIS and DCS
013 • ANSam detection
• V. 34 transmission
• CSI / TSI / CIG transmit
• ECM mode
• Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN / PIN signals
015 • Program individual autodialer attributes
• Sending RTC signal when transmission is canceled
• Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs
• Action after EOR signal
016 • Additional data on TTI transmit
• Subscriber ID transmit
• TTI (name) transmit
017 • Time between ANSam output and CM output
• Check only manually entered fax numbers in ID check transmission
020 • Data error rate
• Pause one second after sending CED
• Time between ANSam output and DIS output
• Receive speed
021 • DIS "inch" declaration
• T1 timer
• Print image data when post message is not received after receiving
RTC signal
• DIS / DTC Extend field Transmit
• G3 echo receive
3-29

023 • V .34 reception
• Action at time-out in Fax / tel ready mode
• Calling period in Fax / Tel reception mode
030 • Number of HDLC end flags
• Digital cable equalizer
• Tone detection level
031 • EYE-Q check level at 7200 bps
• EYE-Q check level at 9600 bps
032 • EYE-Q slice level
• Check EYE-Q
033 • Delete receive echo of CFR at the receiver side
• Expand FSK receive time after detecting flag
040 • Document length limitation
051 • Error line replacement
052 • Add remote fax mark to the journal report
• Name printing priority on journal report
060 • CML relay off time after dialing
• DTMF tones heard through handset
061 • Off-hook / on-hook detect time
062 • CNG detect in Ans / Fax read
• Switch-hook time
064 • CNG detect period after TAD begins recording ICM
• CNG detect period after TAD answers
065 • Adjustment of CI detect time
• Beep if fax handset is hanged up
070 • Display error line
• Tonal line monitor
• Print check message if power is lost
• Print page if error occurs during memory transmission
• Print check message
071 • Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when
the result is NG
• Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when
the result is OK
• Print T.30 monitor at communication error
• Print T.30 monitor
• Display modem speed
072 • Erase polled document
076 • Timing to turn off the S-Relay at fax reception
• Display when there is no TTI
097 • Day light saving time (Summer time) start month
• Day light saving time (Summer time) start week
098 • Day light saving time (Summer time) end month
• Day light saving time (Summer time) end week
3-30

Memory switch 00x : Dialer
Memory switch 000 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Factory use only —
5 0 CED detection condition Sets whether the detection should be strict not.
4 0
Normal   Strict
350 ms 500 ms 700 ms 1000 ms
Switch 5 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 1
3 0 DIS detect time after dialing Sets the DIS signal is detected after dialing a number.
0 : 55 sec
1 : 70 sec
2 1 CED detection Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on the telephone
0 : No line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED signal.
1 : Yes
0 0 Phone line type for the first When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial tone and
phone line acts according to the setting of memory switch 000, bit "1" .
0 : PSTN When set to PBX, the machine always dials a given number
1 : PBX of seconds after going off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the
number of seconds.
3-31

Memory switch 001 :

Initial
Setting
5 0 DIS detection condition Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.
4 0
Normal   Strict
200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms
Switch 5 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 1
3 0 PBX mode dial pause Sets the number of seconds the machine waits before dialing
2 1 when memory switch 000, bit “0” is set to PBX mode.
1 0
0 0 Switch 3210 Pause time
0000 0 sec
0001 1 sec
0010 2 sec
0011 3 sec
0100 4 sec Initial setting
0101 5 sec
0110 6 sec
0111 7 sec
1000 8 sec
1001 9 sec
1010 10 sec
1011 11 sec
1100 12 sec
1101 13 sec
1110 14 sec
1111 15 sec
Memory switch 002 :

Initial
Setting
0 1 Redial in D.0.7 error When set to “1” , the machine does not redial in D.0.7 error
0 : Yes (Incoming detection time over).
1 : No
Memory switch 003 : Factory use only
3-32

Memory switch 004 :

Initial
Setting
3 0 DTMF attenuation See table below.
2 1 The setting of this switch is available only when setting other
1 1 than 0.
0 1
Memory Switch 004 : DTMF attenuation

Switch -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0
dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3-33

Memory switch 005 :

Initial
Setting
6 1 Ring signal detect time Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected after
5 1 hanging up. (Fax / Tel Ready mode only.)
4 0
Switch 654
000 100 ms
001 200 ms
010 300 ms
011 400 ms
100 500 ms
101 600 ms
110 700 ms
111 800 ms
3 0 Number of CI signal de- Select the number of detection time of CI signal in the Fax /
tection in Fax / Tel Ready Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode.
mode Incoming calls are answered according to this setting regard-
0 : Detect 1 time less of the number of rings chosen in the User Settings.
1 : Detect 2 times
2 0 Dual ring detection When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer an incom-
ing ring with an off time of 120-60 ms.
1 0 Long ring detection Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring if the ring
0 : No on time is longer than two seconds.
1 : Yes
0 1 Frequency of the CI signal When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of the in-
0 : No coming CI signal.
1 : Yes
Memory switch 006~ 009 : Factory use only
3-34

Memory switch 01x : Transmission
Memory switch 010 :

Initial
Setting
7 1 Busy tone detection Set this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit is mistaken
0 : No for a busy signal.
1 : Yes
6 0 Fallback pattern (bps)
2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400
Set at 0 : 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1 : 4 times 1 time 1 time 1 time 1 time 1 time
5 0 Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by the CED
0 : No signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS signal and
1 : Yes transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal.
4 0 V. 29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo suppression
0 : No will cut the beginning portion of the transmitted information
1 : Yes which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and
data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using
G3 high-speed modem training (V. 29).
3 1 Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2 1
1 0 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Memory switch 011 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
6 1
When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data
transmission using this switch.
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms

Switch 7 0 0 1 1
Switch 6 0 1 0 1
5 0 Interval between DCS and TCF
4 0 When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval
between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms

Switch 5 0 0 1 1
Switch 4 0 1 0 1
3 1 Output attenuation See table below
2 0
1 0
0 0
Memory Switch 011 : Output attenuation

Switch -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3-35

Memory switch 012 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 TTI clock type
0 : AM PM clock
1 : 24 hour clock
6 1 TTI calendor type bit 65
5 0 1 1 dd mm yyyy
1 0 mm dd yyyy (default)
0 1 yyyy/mm/dd
4 1 TTI transmit When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI
0 : No includes the followings:
1 : Yes • Sender name
• Sender’s fax number
NOTE • Data & time, and number of pages
Turning TTI To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW
transmission off may 016.
violate local or federal
regulations.)
3 0 ECM response time The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post
0 : 3 sec message.
1 : 4.8 sec
2 0 ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0 : 200 ms
1 : 400 ms
1 0 Interval between DIS and DCS
0 0
0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms
Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1
Memory switch 013 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 ANSam detection During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the
0 : Yes handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.
1 : No
6 0 V. 34 transmission Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
0 : Yes
1 : No
5 0 CSI / TSI / CIG transmit When set at “1”, transmission of the CSI, TSI and CIG signals
0 : Yes are disabled.
1 : No
4 0 ECM mode Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document mem-
0 : On ory and may lengthen transmission and reception times.
1 : Off
3 0 Retransmit automatically When set to “1”, retransmission disables automatically if re-
when receiving RTN / PIN ceiving RTN / PIN signals.
signals
0 : Yes
1 : No
3-36

Memory switch 015 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Program individual autodi- Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as attribute
aler attributes 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and 013 as attribute 4
0 : No when fax destination are programmed. (Refer to page 3-54 for
1 : Yes settings.)
2 0 Sending RTC signal when RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission.
transmission is canceled When set at “0”, the machine will send the RTC if the transmis-
0 : Yes sion is canceled. No error will occur.
1 : No When set at “1”, an error will occur because RTC will not be
sent at the end of a canceled transmission.
1 1 Cancel redial if T.4.1 or When set at “0”, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the machine
T.4.4 error occurs will not retry the transmission.
0 : Yes
1 : No
0 1 Action after EOR signal Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400 bps.
0 : Continue
1 : Discontinue
Memory switch 016 :

Initial
Setting
3 1 A d d i t i o n a l d a t a o n T T I When set at “0”, the transmission of the additional data (time,
transmit the number of pages, file number, etc) is disabled.
0 : No
1 : Yes NOTE
This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit
4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available.
2 1 Subscriber ID transmit When set at “0”, the transmission of the subscriber ID is
0 : No disabled.
1 : Yes
NOTE
1 1 TTI (name) transmit When set at “0”, the transmission of the name which was
0 : No stored in the unit is disabled.
1 : Yes
NOTE
3-37

Memory switch 017 :

Initial
Setting
3 0 Time between ANSam out- When using optical communication line, wait to make sure that
2 0 put and CM output the terminal adopter has turned the echo-canceler off.
1 0 Waiting too long may fail the receiver to catch the CM and go
to V 17 procedures.
This setting is needed only for optical communication line.
bit 321
111 1750 msec
110 1500 msec
101 1250 msec
100 1000 msec
011 750 msec
010 500 msec
001 250 msec
000 Refers the time set on the modem
0 0 Check only manually en- When set at “1” , the ID check transmission will check only the
tered fax numbers in ID manually entered fax numbers and not check the number en-
check transmission tered using the address book.
0 : No
1 : Yes
Memory switch 018 ~ 019 : Factory use only
3-38

Memory switch 02x : Reception
Memory switch 020 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Data error rate Determines the allowable number of erred lines out of total
0 : 10% lines received in a document.
1 : 20%
6 0 Pause one second after A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression in some
sending CED telephone equipment. When set to "1", the machine pauses
0 : No (75 ms) one second after sending CED, which allows echo suppres-
1 : Yes (1 sec) sion to restart. This may help with problematic overseas recep-
tion.
5 1 Time between ANSam out- This setting is for optical communication line.
put and DIS output Adjust the time between ANSam output completion and DIS
0 : 75msec. output start. (When V.8 procedure dose not start by output
1 : 450msec. ANSam, it moves to V.8 procedure by output DIS)
Terminal adopter turns the echo-canceler off and then on with-
in 400 ms during the silent time.
Use this adjustment to make sure that the echo-canceler is
turned on again, when the communication procedure has
moved from V.34 to T.30.
3 1 Receive speed (kbps)
2 1 Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines.
1 0
0 1 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
3-39

Memory switch 02x : Reception
Memory switch 021 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 DIS "inch" declaration
0 : No
1 : Yes
4 0 T1 timer Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials the remote
0 : 35 sec machine’s phone number, it begins sending CNG and waits
1 : 20 sec this amount of time before disconnecting the line.
3 1 Print image data when post If the received document includes the RTC, the machine prints
message is not received the data even though the following protocol is not succeeded.
after receiving RTC signal
0 : No
1 : Yes
2 0 DIS / DTC Extend field Setting this switch to "1" will disable ITU-T superfine mode.
Transmit
0 : Yes
1 : No (Tx until Bit No.24 of
DIS / DTC)
1 0 G3 echo receive
0 1 Adjusts the delay between detection of training / TCF and sending of CFR.
100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms

Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1
Memory switch 023 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 V .34 reception Individual setting for V.34 reception.
0 : Yes
1 : No
3 1 Action at time-out in Fax / Set this switch to “1”, to receive fax when time-over occurs in
tel ready mode Fax / tel ready mode.
0 : Hang up
1 : Receive fax
2 0 Calling period in Fax / Tel Defines the calling period in Fax / Tel reception mode.
1 0 reception mode
0 0 bit 210
000 30 seconds Initial setting
001 40 seconds
010 50 seconds
011 60 seconds
100 90 seconds
101 120 seconds
110 180 seconds
111 300 seconds
Memory switch 024~029 : Factory use only

3-40

Memory switch 03x : Modem
Memory switch 030 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Number of HDLC end flags Defines the number of HDLC end flags.
6 0
5 1 Switch 7654
4 0 0000 1
0001 2
0010 3 Initial setting
0011 4
0100 5
0101 6
0110 7
0111 8
1000 9
1001 10
1010 11
1011 12
1100 13
1101 14
1110 15
1111 16
1 0 Digital cable equalizer When set to “1”, become efficient for the line short break,
0 : Free but become weak for the line noise. It’s available only for
1 : Hold communication at 14,400 or 12,000 bit/s.
0 0 Tone detection level When set to “1”, detection level goes up but it becomes noise-
0 : -43 dBm sensitive.
1 : -48 dBm Adjust CED (2100 Hz) detection level in Unique switch 035.
Memory switch 031 :

Initial
Setting
7 1 EYE-Q check level at 0 0 1 1
6 0 7200 bps Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
3-41

Memory switch 03x : Modem
Memory switch 032 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 EYE-Q slice level Setting this bit to “1” enables memory switch 032, bits 0-3
0 : Disable and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and enables EYE-Q check
1 : Enable adjustment.
6 1 Check EYE-Q Set at 0 : Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not checked after
0 : No checking TCF.
1 : Yes Set at 1 : Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked after
checking TCF.
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
Memory switch 033 :

Initial
Setting
1 0 Delete receive echo of CFR Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode.
at the receiver side Sets this switch to “1” to resolve the problem caused of the
0 : No echo of CFR.
1 : Yes
0 0 Expand FSK receive time Setting this switch to “1” extend HDLC frame receive timer
after detecting flag in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after detecting pre-
0 : 3.3 seconds amble.
1 : 10 seconds
3-42

Memory switch 04x : Scanner
Memory switch 040 :

Initial
Setting
0 1 Document length limit Setting to unlimited will override document jam sensing. See
the table below.
Memory Mode (mm)

Switch 40 -0
0 COPY 500
FAX Ultra-fine 500
SCAN Hyper-fine 900
Super-fine 1,500
Fine 1,500
Normal 1,500
1 COPY 500
FAX Ultra-fine 500
SCAN Hyper-fine 500
Super-fine 900
Fine 900
Normal 900
3-43

Memory switch 05x : Printer
Memory switch 051 :

Initial
Setting
0 0 Error line replacement When an error line is caused, the line will be replaced to the
0:R eplace to the former designated line.
line
1 : Replace to a white line
Memory switch 052

Initial
Setting
5 0 Add remote fax mark to the Set this function to “1” to print an “R” on the journal report
journal report when the location name is acquired from the remote fax
0 : No machine.
1 : Yes
4 0 Name printing priority on Select name printing priority.
3 0 journal report Refer table below.
2 0
1 0
0 0
Bit 43210 First priority Second priority Third priority

00000 Address Book Entry Address Book Number Subscriber ID
00001 Subscriber ID Address Book Number
00100 Address Book Entry Subscriber ID Address Book Number
00111 Address Book Number Address Book Entry Subscriber ID
01010 Address Book Number Subscriber ID Address Book Entry
10011 Subscriber ID Address Book Entry Address Book Number
10101 Subscriber ID Address Book Number Address Book Entry
3-44

Memory switch 06x : Remote reception
Memory switch 060 :

Initial
Setting
6 1 CML relay off time after When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise may occur as
dialing the CML relay switches on and off.
0 : 1 sec Set this switch to “0” to avoid this.
1 : 200 ms
5 0 DTMF tones heard through Determines if DTMF tones are produced through the handset
handset in off-hook dialing.
0 : No
1 : Yes
Memory switch 061 :

Initial
Setting
3 0 Off-hook / on-hook detect Sets the time interval between the on-hook and off-hook (or
2 1 time off-hook/on-hook) condition.
1 0 Switch 3210 Time
0 0 0000 0 ms
0001 100 ms
0010 200 ms
0011 300 ms
0100 400 ms Initial setting
0101 500 ms
0110 600 ms
0111 700 ms
1000 800 ms
1001 900 ms
1010 1000 ms
1011 1100 ms
1100 1200 ms
1101 1300 ms
1110 1400 ms
1111 1500 ms
3-45

Memory switch 062 :
Initial
Setting
4 1 CNG detect in Ans / Fax When set to “1”, the machine detects the CNG signal in Ans /
ready Fax ready.
0 : No
1 : Yes
3 0 Switch-hook time If the switch hook is quickly depressed and released, switch-
2 0 to-fax will occur. This setting adjusts how quickly the switch
1 1 hook activation must be.
0 1
Switch 3210 Time
0000 0 ms
0001 100 ms
0010 200 ms
0011 300 ms Initial setting
0100 400 ms
0101 500 ms
0110 600 ms
0111 700 ms
1000 800 ms
1001 900 ms
1010 1000 ms
1011 1100 ms
1100 1200 ms
1101 1300 ms
1110 1400 ms
1111 1500 ms
3-46

Memory switch 064 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 CNG detect period after Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD
6 0 TAD begins recording ICM begins recording incoming message.
5 1
0000 0 sec
0001 10 sec
0010 20 sec
0100 40 sec
0101 50 sec
0110 60 sec
0111 70 sec
1000 80 sec
1001 90 sec
1010 100 sec
1011 110 sec
1100 120 sec
1101 130 sec
1110 140 sec
1111 150 sec
3 0 CNG detect period after Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD
2 0 TAD answers answers an incoming call.
1 0
0000 0 sec
0010 20 sec
0011 30 sec
0100 40 sec
0101 50 sec
0110 60 sec
0111 70 sec
1000 80 sec
1001 90 sec
1010 100 sec
1011 110 sec
1100 120 sec
1101 130 sec
1110 140 sec
1111 150 sec
Incoming rings
TAD plays Outgoing message TAD records Incoming message
CNG detection is active CNG detection is active

(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 0-3) (Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 4-7)
3-47

Memory switch 065 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Adjustment of CI detect Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI detect time.
time
6 0
Switch 76543 Time
5 0 11111 150 msec
4 0 11101 140 msec
: :
01001 40 msec
00111 30 msec
00101 20 msec
00011 10 msec
00000 0 msec Initial setting
00010 -10 msec
00100 -20 msec
00110 -30 msec
01000 -40 msec
: :
11100 -140 msec
11110 -150 msec
3 0
0 0 Beep if fax handset is Determines if your machine beeps when having left the fax’s
hanged up handset hanging up after communication.
0 : Yes
1 : No
3-48

Memory switch 07x : Operation
Memory switch 070 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Display error line The number of error lines contained in the received
0 : No data will be shown in the LCD.
1 : Yes
6 0 Tonal line monitor Allows fax communication to be heard through the
5 monitor speaker.
bit 65
1 0 ON
0 1 Monitor until DIS outputs
0 0 OFF

3 1 Print check message if If the machine could not hold the memory in an event of power
power is lost losses, documents will be lost. When power is restored, a
0 : No check message will print.
1 : Yes
2 1 Print page if error occurs For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for
during memory transmis- memory transmission will print along a check message if an
sion error occurs during memory transmission.
0 : No
1 : Yes
1 1 Print check message To notify the user of an error, a check message can be printed
0 : No if a communication error occurs.
1 : Yes
3-49

Memory switch 071 :

Initial
Setting
5 1 Print TCR with the original For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for
page during memory trans- memory transmission will print along a TCR when the trans-
mission when the result is mission result is NG.
NG
0 : No
1 : Yes
3 1 Print TCR with the original For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for
page during memory trans- memory transmission will print along a TCR when the trans-
mission when the result is mission result is OK.
OK
0 : No
1 : Yes
2 0 Print T.30 monitor at com- Set this switch to “1” to print out T.30 monitor automatically at
munication error communication error.
0 : No
1 : Yes
1 0 Print T.30 monitor Set this switch to “1” to print out T.30 monitor by each commu-
nication.
0 0 Display modem speed The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.
0 : No
1 : Yes
Memory switch 071 — Print TCR with the original page

Switch 3 0 1
Switch 5 0 1 0 1
When Memory transmission was OK, … No No Yes Yes
When Memory transmission was NG, … No Yes No Yes
When all broadcast transmissions were OK, … No No Yes Yes
When some broadcast transmissions were NG, … No Yes No Yes
Memory switch 072 :

Initial
Setting
1 1 Erase polled document Determines if a document stored for polling is erased after
0 : No being polled.
1 : Yes
3-50

Memory switch 076 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Timing to turn off the S- Adjust this setting when a private exchanger disconnects the
6 0 Relay at fax reception. line when S-Relay is turned off.
5 0 Bit 7654 time
4 0 1111 1500 seconds
1110 1400 seconds
: :
1010 1000 seconds
1001 900 seconds
0100 800 seconds
: :
0100 500 seconds
0100 400 seconds
0011 300 seconds
0010 200 seconds
0001 100 seconds
0000 10 seconds (default)
3 1 Display when there is no

TTI
0 : No
1 : Yes
Memory switch 08x : Not used
3-51

Memory switch 09x : Miscellaneous
Memory switch 097 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Day light saving time This switch sets the month when the day light saving
6 0 (Summer time) start month time (summer time) begins.
5 1 Switch 7 6 5 4 Time
4 1 0000 March
0001 January
0010 February
0011 March (Initial setting)
0100 April
0101 May
0110 June
0111 July
1000 August
1001 September
1010 October
1 0 1 1 November
1100 December
3 0 Day light saving time This switch sets on which week when the day light
(Summer time) start week saving time (summer time) begins.
Start day light saving from Sunday 1:00

2 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 of the last week
0 0 0 1 of the first week
0 0 1 0 of the second week (initial)
0 0 1 1 of the third week
0 1 0 0 of the fourth week
0 1 0 1 of the last week of the month
3-52

Memory switch 09x : Miscellaneous
Memory switch 098 :

Initial
Setting
7 1 Day light saving time This switch sets the month when the day light sav-
6 0 (Summer time) end month ing time (summer time) ends.
4 1 0000 October
0001 January
0010 February
0011 March
0100 April
0101 May
0110 June
0111 July
1000 August
1001 September
1010 October
1 0 1 1 November (initial)
1100 December
3 0 Day light saving time This switch sets the week when the day light saving
(Summer time) end week time (summer time) ends.
End day light saving from Sunday 1:00

2 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 of the last week
0 0 0 1 of the first week (Initial)
0 0 1 0 of the second week
0 0 1 1 of the third week
0 1 0 0 of the fourth week
0 1 0 1 of the last week
3-53

3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes
This function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown in
Memory Switches 010, 011, 012, 013 and 014.
To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 15, bit 7 to “1”. (See “3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches” for more informa-
tion on changing memory switch 015.)
2. When the function is enabled, an “Attribute” option is added to the address book destination regis-
tration steps. As an address book destination is programmed, an extra step showing Attribute 1,
Attribute 2, Attribute 3, Attribute 4, and Attribute 5 are added as the last step.
3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. To change a setting, press or
until the cursor is below the desired bit position; then press “1” or “0” to make the change.
4. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute.
5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3-4.
6. When the last attribute is set, the fax will advance to the next autodialer programming steps.
3-54

Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)
Initial
Setting
7 1 Busy tone detection Sets this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit
0: No is mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
6 0 Fallback pattern (bps)
2400 4800 7200 9600 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
5 0 Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
4 0 V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
3 1 Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1
3-55

Initial
Setting
7 0 The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.
6 1
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms
Switch 7 0 0 1 1
Switch 6 0 1 0 1
5 0 Interval between DCS and TCF
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
4 0
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms
Switch 5 0 0 1 1
Switch 4 0 1 0 1
3 *
2 * Output attenuation See table below.
1 *
0 *
Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

Switch -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3-56

Initial
Setting
7 0 TTI clock type
0 : AM PM clock
1 : 24 hour clock
6 1 TTI calendor type bit 65
5 0 1 1 dd mm yyyy
1 0 mm dd yyyy (default)
0 1 yyyy/mm/dd
4 1 TTI transmit When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled.

0: No The TTI includes the followings:
1: Yes • Sender name
• Sender’s fax number
NOTE • Data & time, and number of pages
Turning TTI transmission To set the individually transmission of them, see
off may violate local or Memory SW 016.
federal regulations.)
3 0 ECM response time The time limit to receive the response signal for the
0: 3 sec ECM post message.
1: 4.8 sec
2 0 ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
1 0 Interval between DIS and DCS
0 0 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms

Switch 1 0 0 1 1
Switch 0 0 1 0 1

Initial
Setting
7 0 ANSam detection During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the
0 : Yes handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.
1 : No
6 0 V. 34 transmission Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
0 : Yes
1 : No
5 0 CSI / TSI / CIG transmit When set at “1”, transmission of the CSI, TSI and
0 : Yes CIG signals are disabled.
1 : No
4 0 ECM mode Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces docu-
0 : On ment memory and may lengthen transmission and
1 : Off reception times.
3 0 Retransmit automatically when When set to “1”, retransmission disables automati-
receiving RTN / PIN signals cally if receiving RTN / PIN signals.
0 : Yes
1 : No
3-57

3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment
3.5.1 Setting the Unique Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery
maintains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <0>, <4>.

2. Press [Switch Edit].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ] or [ ] , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the unique switch settings:

6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
3-58

3.5.2 Clearing the Unique Switches
Resets the unique switches to factory defaults.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <0>, <4>.

2. Press [Switch Clear].
3. Press [Yes]. The unique switches will reset to factory defaults.
4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
Adjustable items :
000 • Time to output simulated ring tone

• Congestion tone detection
001 • Enable the first tone key
• Enable the second tone key
• Enable the dial prefix key
003 • Display only direct input number on redial list
• The period before detecting busytone after dialing
010 • Including TTI inside the document
• The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission
013 • Encoding method
015 • V.8 handshake in real time Tx
016 • Available *, # and space upon F-code box registration
• Available *, # and space upon F-code communicating
• Ignore space in F-code ID
• F-code sub-frame off
• Retrieve document
• Ignore F-code bit
017 • JBIG transmission
018 • Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under
7200 bps
• Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under
4800 bps
• Transmission when disable to detect first NSF in real time
transmission
019 • Number of redial times for archive transmission
020 • Transmit CED signal
• Pseudo-ring start time
• Printout the pages completed to receive during receiving into memory
021 • TCF check time (in 100 ms units)
022 • Document storage method
• MMR reception
• JBIG reception
• Receive the junk fax
023 • Receiving fax in 600 dpi (Super fine)
• Encoding method
029 • Displays the message “No Network Connection.”
3-59

030 • 3429 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34
• 3200 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34
032 • ANSam output time
035 • Reception level at CED 2100 Hz
037 • The timing between V.34 handshake signals
040 • Show the lamp in error
043 • Conform the numbers of line on the front page and back page
045 • Enable measures for false detection of punch holes as a document
leading edge
• Enables measures for false detection of punch holes as a document
trailing edge
• Enable measures for false detection of punch holes as a document
leading edge
• Punch hole maximum size adjustment
050 • Smoothing in Hyper Fine (400 x 400 dpi) mode
• Smoothing in Super Fine (200 x 400 dpi) mode
• Smoothing in Fine mode
• Smoothing in Normal mode
051 • Give priority to “fit to paper”
052 • Printing margin adjustment
053 • Printer density adjustment
067 • CNG detection during OGM output in ANS Ready
• Number of detection DTMF
071 • Line monitor in Quick memory transmission
• Rx document to polling document
072 • DRAM back up
075 • Journal list printing order
• Key press time to activate sleep mode
077 • Print time-out on PCL text printing (at local printing)
078 • Print timeout on GDI (at local printing)
079 • Print timeout on PCL (at local printing)
081 • Print dialing error on journal
082 • Copy all data at “Copy Machine Settings”
085 • Print/Send the consumable order sheet when the drum is near end
• Print/Send the consumable order sheet when toner is near empty
• Receive time stamp position
095 • F4 paper length
098 • Respond warm-up condition as ready on SNMP
• Respond Sleep condition as ready on SNMP
099 • Enable Quick TWAIN
3-60

Unique Switch 00x : Dialer
Unique Switch 000 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 Time to output simulated ring Adjust the time from income to output ring tone. (The
5 1 tone time to detect CED)
4 1
bit 654
1 1 1 4.9 seconds
1 1 0 4.6 seconds
1 0 1 4.3 seconds
1 0 0 4.0 seconds
0 1 1 3.7 seconds default
0 1 0 3.4 seconds
0 0 1 3.1 seconds
0 0 0 2.8 seconds

2 1 Congestion tone detection Setting this switch to “0” ignores telephone line
0: No congestion tones.
1: Yes
Unique Switch 001 :

Initial
Setting
3 0 Enable the first tone key
0: No
1: Yes
2 0 Enable the second tone key
0: No
1: Yes
1 1 Enable the dial prefix key
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 002 — Factory use only
3-61

Unique Switch 00x : Dialer
Unique Switch 003 :

Initial
Setting
6 1 Display only direct input Set this switch to “0” to display all dial history on the
number on redial list redial list. Set this switch to “1” to display only direct
0: Yes input number on the list.
1: No
3 0 The period before detecting Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
2 0 busytone after dialing 1111 1500 ms
1 0 1110 1400 ms
0 0 :
1000 800 ms
0111 700 ms
0110 600 ms
0101 500 ms
0100 400 ms (Initial setting)
0011 300 ms
0010 200 ms
0001 100 ms
0000 0 ms
Unique Switch 004 ~ 009 — Factory use only
3-62

Unique Switch 01x : Transmission
Unique Switch 010 :

Initial
Setting
3 1 Including TTI inside the Setting this bit to “0” transmit the document length
document added with the TTI. Setting it to “1” transmit the
0: No length including TTI inside the document. However
1: Yes in this case, the image at the top of the document
might be overlapped with TTI.
(TTI length: 4.2mm)
1 1 The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission
1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times
0 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Unique Switch 013 :

Initial
Setting
1 0 Encoding method Specify the encoding method.
0 0
bit 10
1 1 MMR
1 0 MR
0 1 MH
0 0 Machine capability (default)
3-63

Unique Switch 015 — Transmission

Initial
Setting
5 1 Not used
0 1 V.8 handshake in real time Determine I the handshaking will be done with V.8
Tx recommendation if real time transmission.
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 016 — Transmission

Initial
Setting
7 1 Available *, # and space Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
upon F-code box registration are available upon F-code box registration.
0: No
1: Yes
Available *, # and space Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
upon F-code communicating are available upon F-code communicating.
6 1
0: No
1: Yes
5 0 Ignore space in F-code ID Determines if checking the space stored in the
0: Yes F-code ID.
1: No
4 1 F-code sub-frame off Do not send the sub-address and password of
0: Send F-code box when a point of sending DCS signal
1: Not send after EOM signal.
1 0 Retrieve document Retrieve the document received in F-code
0: No SecureMail box by polling transmission.
1: Yes
0 1 Ignore F-code bit Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS
0: No signal at F-code polled transmission.
1: Yes
Note
The “F-code communication” is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code
(SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.
3-64

Unique Switch 017 :

Initial
Setting
1 1 JBIG transmission Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 018 :

Initial
Setting
4 0 Disconnect the line when Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
the transmission speed falls when the transmission speed fall down under 7200
down under 7200 bps bps.
0: No
1: Yes
3 0 Disconnect the line when Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
the transmission speed falls when the transmission speed fall down under 4800
down under 4800 bps bps.
0: No
1: Yes
0 0 Transmission when disable to Determines the action when disable to detect first
detect first NSF in real time NSF in real time transmission.
transmission.
0: Retry to detect NSF
1: Transmit with the standard
protocol
3-65

Unique Switch 019 :

Initial
Setting
3 1 Number of redial times for Switch 4 3 2 1 0 Settings
2 1 archive transmission 0000 0 time
1 1 0001 1 time
0 1 0010 2 times
0011 3 times
0100 4 times
0101 5 times
0110 6 times
0111 7 times
1000 8 times
1001 9 times
1010 10 times
1011 11 times
1100 12 times
1101 13 times
1110 14 times
1111 15 times (default)
3-66

Unique Switch 02x : Reception
Unique Switch 020 :

Initial
Setting
4 1 Transmit CED signal Determines if sending CED signal.
0: No
1: Yes
3 1 Pseudo-ring start time Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after
(seconds) answering an incoming call.
5 6 8 10 (Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)
2 0 Switch 3: 0 0 1 1
Switch 2: 0 1 0 1
1 1 Printout the pages completed Determines if whether to printout the page which
to receive during receiving data is completed to receive during receiving it into
into memory fax’s memory.
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 021 :

Initial
Setting
3 1 TCF check time If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the
(in 100 ms units) result, lengthen the TCF check time.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
2 0 0000 0 ms
0001 100 ms
0010 200 ms
0011 300 ms
0100 400 ms
0101 500 ms
1 0 0110 600 ms
0111 700 ms
1000 800 ms  Initial setting
1001 900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
0 0 1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-67

Unique Switch 022 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Document storage method bit7 6 5
6 1 1 0 1 JBIG
5 1 1 0 0 MG3
0 1 1 MMR Initial setting
0 1 0 MR
0 0 1 MH
0 0 0 IMAGE
4 1 MMR reception Used to determine the encoding method at DIS
0: No declaration.
1: Yes
3 1 JBIG reception Used to determine the encoding method at DIS
0: No declaration.
1: Yes
Unique Switch 023 :

Initial
Setting
2 1 Receiving fax in 600 dpi Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.
(Super fine)
0: No
1: Yes
1 0 Encoding method Used to determine the encoding method at DIS
0 0 declaration.
Specify the encoding method.
bit 10
1 1 MMR
1 0 MR
0 1 MH
0 0 Machine capability (default)
3-68

Unique Switch 029 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 Displays the message “No Set this switch to “1” will delete the message
Network Connection.” “No Network Connection.” Use this switch if the
0 : Yes machine is not used in a network.
1 : No
3-69

Unique Switch 03x : Modem
Unique Switch 030 :

Initial
Setting
5 1 3429 baud symbol rate when If the error frame often occurs because of the
communicating at V.34 symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to
0: No “1” mask that symbol rate and keep down the
1: Yes occurrence of error frame.
4 1 3200 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0 1 2400 baud symbol rate when See above (switch 5 to 2).
0: No
1: Yes
3-70

Unique Switch 032 :

Initial
Setting
2 1 ANSam output time The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave
0: 3 seconds signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to “1”
1: 4 seconds when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.
Unique Switch 033 ~034 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 035 :

Initial
Setting
3 0 Reception level at CED 2100 Measure for false detection caused by noise.
2 0 Hz Adjust this switch when CED is falsely detected
and T.1.1 error occurs.
bit 32
1 1 -51 dBm
1 0 -48 dBm
0 1 -41 dBm
0 0 -45 dBm (default)

3-71

Unique Switch 037 :

Initial
Setting
4 0 The delay before post- If retraining occurs due to the low reception signal
message is transmitted level and few delay of the telephone line, it may
overlap the second post-message. In this case,
increase the delay before the post-message is
transmitted.
3 0
0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms
Switch 4: 0 0 1 1
Switch 3: 0 1 0 1

Unique Switch 038 ~ 039 --- Factory use only
3-72

Unique Switch 04x :Scanner
Unique Switch 040 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 Show the lamp in error.
0: FBS lamp error
1: DADF lamp error
Unique Switch 043 :

Initial
Setting
0 0 Conform the numbers of line
on the front page and back
page
0: Conform to the front page
1: Do not conform
Unique Switch 044 --- Factory use only
3-73

Unique Switch 04x :Scanner
Unique Switch 045 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Enable measures for false This switch is a measure to avoid document jam
detection of punch holes as a that occurs when documents with punch holes are
document leading edge scanned.
0: No Always set the following switches together.
1: Yes • Unique switch 045 bit 7
• Unique switch 045 bit 6
(i.e.)
00x0xxxx : Disable (Default)
11x1xxxx : Enable
6 0 Enables measures for false This switch is a measure to avoid document jam
document trailing edge scanned.
(i.e.)
11x1xxxx : Enable
4 0 Enable measures for false This switch is a measure to avoid document jam
document leading edge scanned.
(i.e.)
11x1xxxx : Enable
3 0 Punch hole maximum size Set the maximum punch hole size when unique
2 0 adjustment switch 045- 7, 6, and 4 are activate.
1 0 bit 3210 size
0 0 1111 15 mm (0.59 inch)
1110 14 mm (0.55 inch)
1101 13 mm (0.51 inch)
1100 12 mm (0.47 inch)
1011 11 mm (0.43 inch)
1010 10 mm (0.39 inch)
1001 9 mm (0.35 inch)
1000 8 mm (0.31 inch)
0111 7 mm (0.27 inch)
0110 6 mm (0.23 inch)
0101 5 mm (0.19 inch)
0100 4 mm (0.15 inch)
0011 3 mm (0.11 inch)
0010 2 mm (0.07 inch)
0001 1 mm (0.03 inch)
0000 10 mm (0.39 inch)
3-74

Unique Switch 05x : Printer
Unique Switch 050 :

Initial
Setting
3 0 Smoothing in Hyper-Fine Smooths the data scanned in each resolution mode.
(400 x 400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
2 1 Smoothing in Super-Fine
(200 x 400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
1 0 Smoothing at printing lists
0: No
1: Yes
0 1 Smoothing in Normal mode
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 051 :

Initial
Setting
0 0 Give priority to “fit to paper” When the received fax is larger than paper in
0: No cassette, “0” will print them on suitable size while “1”
1: Yes will reduce to the size to fit then on one paper.
Unique Switch 052 — Printer

Initial
Setting
0 0 Printing margin adjustment
0: Normal
1: No margin
3-75

Unique Switch 05x : Printer
Unique Switch 053 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Printer density adjustment. Switch 76543210 Settings
6 0
5 0 00000000 Not available
4 0 00000001 Lightest
00000010 :
3 0
00000011 :
2 1 00000100
1 0
0 1 00000101 Normal  Initial setting
00000110 :
00001001 Darkest
00001011 Not available
: ↓
3-76

Unique Switch 06x : Remote reception
Unique Switch 067 :

Initial
Setting
4 0 CNG detection during OGM
output in ANS Ready
0: Yes
1: No
3 0 Number of detection DTMF Sets the number of detection the DTMF during Ans/
2 0 Fax Ready mode.
1 1
0 1 Switch 3 2 1 0 Number of detection
0000 Not detect
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3 Initial setting
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10

1111 15
Unique Switch 068 and 069 — Factory use only
3-77

Unique Switch 07x : Operation
Unique Switch 071 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Line monitor in Quick memory
transmission
0: Off
1: On
1 0 Rx document to polling Retrieve the document received in the memory by
document polling transmission.
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 072 :

Initial
Setting
5 1 DRAM backup
0 : No
1 : Yes
3-78

Unique Switch 075 :

Initial
Setting
3 1 Journal list printing order
0: From old history
1: From new history
2 0 Key press time to activate Set how long to press <Energy Save> to activate
1 1 sleep mode sleep mode
0 1 Switch 2 1 0 time
111 7 seconds
110 6 seconds
101 5 seconds
100 4 seconds
011 3 seconds
010 2 seconds
001 1 second
Unique Switch 076 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Threshold to determine paper At “Print on demand” (Box/Folder/USB memory),
6 0 size (vertical direction) from the paper is selected from vertical and horizontal
5 0 pixel and resolution length of the document.
4 0 This threshold determines whether to print on one
page or go to another.
3 0
2 0 bit 76543210
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255 mm
0 0 :
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 200 mm
:
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 150 mm
:
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 100 mm
:
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 50 mm
:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 mm
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 mm (default)
3-79

Unique Switch 077 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Print timeout on PCL text bit 7654
6 0 printing (at local printing) 1 1 1 1 15 seconds
5 0 1 1 1 0 14 seconds
4 1 1 second/step 1 1 0 1 13 seconds
Adjustable range: 1~15 1 1 0 0 12 seconds
seconds 1 0 1 1 11 seconds
1 0 1 0 10 seconds
:
0 1 0 1 5 seconds
0 1 0 0 4 seconds
0 0 1 1 3 seconds
0 0 1 0 2 seconds
0 0 0 1 1 second (default)
0 0 0 0 1 second
Adjust image printing timeout by unique switch 079

bit 7~4.

Unique Switch 078 :

Initial
Setting
3 0 Print timeout on GDI (at local bit 3210
2 1 printing) 1 1 1 1 75 seconds
1 1 1 1 1 0 70 seconds
0 0 5 seconds/step 1 1 0 1 65 seconds
Adjustment range: 5~75 1 1 0 0 60 seconds
seconds :
0 1 1 0 30 seconds (default)
0 1 0 1 25 seconds
0 1 0 0 20 seconds
0 0 1 1 15 seconds
0 0 1 0 10 seconds
0 0 0 1 5 seconds
0 0 0 0 5 seconds
3-80

Unique Switch 079 :

Initial
Setting
7 0 Print timeout on PCL (at local bit 7654
6 1 printing) 1 1 1 1 75 seconds
5 1 1 1 1 0 70 seconds
4 0 5 seconds/step 1 1 0 1 65 seconds
Adjustment range: 5~75 1 1 0 0 60 seconds
seconds :
0 1 1 0 30 seconds (default)
0 1 0 1 25 seconds
0 1 0 0 20 seconds
0 0 1 1 15 seconds
0 0 1 0 10 seconds
0 0 0 1 5 seconds
0 0 0 0 5 seconds
Adjust text printing timeout by unique switch 077 bit

7~4.

3-81

Unique Switch 08x : Miscellaneous
Unique Switch 081 :

Initial
Setting
5 0 Print dialing error on journal
0: No
1: Yes
Unique Switch 082 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 Copy all data at “Copy Use this switch when you replace the main control
Machine Settings” panel.
0: No
1: Yes
3-82

Unique Switch 085 — Miscellaneous

Initial
Setting
6 0 Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when the drum is
near end NOTE
0: Yes For this feature to work correctly, you must
1: No register several items. See “3.17 Consumable
order sheet” on page 3-113.
5 0 Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when toner is
near empty NOTE
0: Yes For this feature to work correctly, you must
1: No register several items. See “3.17 Consumable
order sheet” on page 3-113.
4 0 Receive time stamp position Set where to print the time stamp.
0: Outside the print area
1: Inside the print area
Unique Switch 086 ~ 089— Factory use only
3-83

Unique Switch 095 :

Initial
Setting
1 0 F4 paper length Set the F4 paper length
0 0 Switch 1 0 length
1 0 353 mm
0 1 342 mm
0 0 330 mm (default)
Unique Switch 096 and 097— Factory use only
Unique Switch 098 :

Initial
Setting
6 0 Respond warm-up condition To print on Row port correctly by AS400, set this
as ready on SNMP switch to “1”.
0 : Respond as warm-up When this switch is “1”, SNMP manager such as
1 : Respond as ready WebJetAdmin displays “Ready” even if the printer
is in warm-up condition. When the printer warms up
while it is receiving information on Row port, the job
will be divided. The latter divided job will be printed
with initial font as it has no font information. This
setting will avoid this font issue.
5 0 Respond Sleep condition as To print on Row port correctly by AS400, set this
ready on SNMP switch to “1”.
0 : Respond as sleep When this switch is “1”, SNMP manager such as
1 : Respond as ready WebJetAdmin displays “Ready” even if the printer
is in sleep condition. When the printer sleeps while
it is receiving information on Row port, printing will
be disabled. To enable printing again, this error
should be recovered with administrator authority,
and this setting will avoid this issue.
3-84

Unique Switch 099 :

Initial
Setting
0 0 Enable Quick TWAIN You can enable “Quick TWAIN” instead of the
0: No standard TWAIN box operation.
1: Yes See “3.43 Quick TWAIN Settings” on page 3-156.
3-85

3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings
User programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier
(TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the unit’s Random Access Memory (RAM) and on the CF
memory card that is attached to the network board.
This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2>.
2. Press [Yes].
3.7 All RAM Clear

The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, and
reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the
All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings,
address book entries to help in reprogramming this information.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3>.
2. Press [Yes].
The clear modes initialize the following data :

All RAM Clear User Data Clear
Machine parameter
Memory Switch 
Unique Switch 
Consumable order sheet
Life moniter
Jounal  
Stored images  
Serial number
Network Switch 
Network Capture 
Dial Option Conversion 
IFAX Detail Status 
: Cleared
Blank : Not cleared
3-86

3.8 T.30 Monitor
In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC
structure is shown below.
Preamble Binary coded information
Non-standard facilities frame(NSF) Called subscriber identification frame (CSI) Digital identification frame (DIS)
Facsimili Facsimili Frame

Flag Flag Address Control controll information checking
field field sequence (FCS)
The information in this

portion is printed in the T.30
monitor.
The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet information
follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile
procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.
3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor

This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication.
2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].
3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor

The communications on the journal list are able to print.
1. Press <Job Confirm. / Fax Cancel>.
2. Press the [History] tab and select [Fax Tx] or [Fax Rx].
3. Select the desired communication.
4. Press <*>, <0>, <5>.
3-87

3.8.3 How to see the print out
(Example for fax transmission)
(Example for fax reception)
TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report

RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine
DATA: Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data are
in hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal.
TCF : TCF check sequence
PIX : Image data
[V17 MMR A3 0 F E]
Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on, blank=ECM off)
Mode (S=8dot/mm x 15.4l/mm F=Fine N=Normal)
Receiver's minimum scan line time capability
Recording width document size
Compressing method
Data signalling rate
3-88

NSF, NSC, NSS:
NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30.
The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to the
country code. The second byte is a spare; it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturer
code.
TxFrame RxFrame D A T A
NSF 20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The third byte is the manufactures code

The second byte is spare; currently set at 00H
The first byte indicates the country code
Indicates the NSF code
CSI, CIG, TSI:

CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code,
and subscriber’s telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digit
of the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit number
and their value. Below the code table is a CSI example.
Code Value Code Value Code Value Code Value
20 Space 32 2 35 5 38 8
30 0 33 3 36 6 39 9
31 1 34 4 37 7 2B +
An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as:

CIS 30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 20 20 20 20
DIS, DTC, DCS:

DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and
receive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc.
DIS 00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00
The bits are in the following order:

( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17)
(32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41)
(56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57)
Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number:
Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary
0 0000 4 0100 8 1000 C 1100
1 0001 5 0101 9 1001 D 1101
2 0010 6 0110 A 1010 E 1110
3 0011 7 0111 B 1011 F 1111
So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
3-89

A transmission with PPR signal:
The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal.
PPS MPS BF 4F 00 00 0F
PPR BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value.
So in the above case:
Pages: 00 means one page
Blocks: 00 means one block
Frames: 0F means 16 frames
In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0"
and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.
3.9 Printer maintenance mode

In case of followings, use this mode.
• When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller.
• When “Checkout error : XX” message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause
of the “Checkout error : XX” error message.
• To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode.
3.9.1 When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller

To access the printer maintenance mode:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Set Replace Counter].
3. If you’ve replaced the fuser, select [Replace Fuser].

If you have replaced the transfer roller skip to step 5.
3-90

4. Press [Yes].
5. If you’ve replaced the transfer roller, select [Replace Transfer Belt].

6. Press [Yes]. The machine goes back to standby mode.
3.9.2 When “Checkout error : XX” message is displayed

To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the “Checkout error : XX” error
message.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Service Call].
3. The kind of printer error will be displayed.
NOTE
See “4.3 Checkout error” on page 4-3 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each
are outlined.
3.9.3 Register the e-mail location

To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Service Call e-mail].
3. Select [Send Service Call E-Mail].
3-91

4. Select [ON] and press [Enter].
5. Select [E-mail Mail Address 1].
6. Enter the e-mail address and press [Enter].

7. To send the service report to another location, press [E-mail Address 2] and/or [E-mail Address 3]
and enter the location. Otherwise, skip to step 8.
8. Select [E-Mail Subject].
9. Edit the e-mail subject if needed, and press [Enter].
10. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode.
3-92

3.10 Service Report Printing
You can print out a report that contains machine’s usage and error history.
3.10.1 Printing the Service Report

3.10.2 Contents of the service report
NOTE
Some device on the service report may not be equipped on your machine.
Contents of the header
Line Item Detail

1 Date Current date
2 Unit Serial # The machine serial number
Cust Name The registered TTI or the “Customer’s name” registered in
Consumable Order Sheet
3 Fax Number The fax number registered in User Install
Cust Tel The telephone number registered in Consumable Order
Sheet
4 Installation Date The date the machine was installed (The date set at User in-
stall)
Days Used / Work Days Days since the machine is installed / Days the machine has
worked
5 ROM Version The ROM version of Main ROM, PDL ROM, and OfficeBri-
dge
The header is common for simple report and detailed report.
3-93

First page of the report.
No. Detail
1 • Paper size per unit
• Number of total printed pages
• Number of pages printed on current drum (I/C)
• Number of pages printed after the resettable counter is cleared and the cleared date.
2 Number of printed pages based on counter calculating procedure
(Four legal size paper is counted five letter size paper)
3 Printer trouble information (Total pages and the pages after the resettable counter is
cleared)
• Number of jammed pages
• Number of printed pages per jammed section
4 • Number of scanned pages / Number of scanned times
• Number of scanned pages / Number of scanned times after the resettable counter is
cleared and the cleared date
5 Number of scanned pages based on counter calculating procedure
(Four legal size paper is counted five letter size paper)
6 Scanner trouble information (Total pages and the pages after the resettable counter is
cleared)
• Number of document jammed pages per jammed section
7 Life counter
The resettable counter cleared date is printed with six figure of year / month / date.
3-94

Second page of the report
10
11
No. Detail
8 Number of printed pages per paper size and print job.
• Total printed pages
• Total printed pages on current drum (I/C)
9 Number of printed pages per paper media and mode.
10 Number of page per optional device and print job.
11 Number of scanned pages per document size and mode
3-95

Third page of the report
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
No. Detail
12 Number of communication times per communication type
13 Number of PC scan times
14 Number of times advanced functions used
15 Number of customer registered information
16 Machine set-up information
17 Number of fax communication error per error code
18 Number of internet-fax communication error
19 ( for engineer only)
3-96

Fourth page of the report
20
21
22
23
No. Detail
20 20 latest scanner error histories
21 20 latest printer error histories
22 20 latest printer jam histories
23 ( for engineer only)
Fifth page is for engineer only.
3-97

3.11 Monitor speaker
If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signal
sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8>.

2. Select the monitor type from [ON until DIS] or [ON].
3. Select the speaker volume.

To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [OFF].
3.12 Test Modes

This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included
are followings.
• Life monitor
• Test pattern print
• Document feeding test
• Set background level
• Make color Gamma
• Select color Gamma
3.12.1 Life Monitor

This function displays the machine status.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Life Monitor].
2. Press [Detail] to see the options.
• ROM Ver.0 = displays main control board software version

• ROM Ver.1 = displays network software (OfficeBridge) version
• ROM Ver.2 = displays PDL (printer description language) version
Display Item Detail
Scan Count
1 Page Count Cumulative total pages
Tx (Transmission) Count
Drum Recycled Number of times drum is replaced
Drum Life Current drum working time (x 10 seconds)
2 After Replaced Total printed pages on current drum
After Caution Total printed pages since "Replace drum" warning is
displayed
3-98

Display Item Detail
Toner Recycled Number of times toner cartridge is replaced
Toner Life Toner cartridge working time (x 10 seconds)
3 After Replaced Total printed pages on current toner cartridge
After Caution Total printed pages since "Toner near end" warning is
displayed
Fuser Replaced Number of times fuser is replaced
Fuser Life Current fuser working time (x 10 seconds)
4
Xsfer Replaced Number of times transfer roller is replaced
Xfer Life Current transfer roller working time (x 10 seconds)
Word Count (In Use) The number of words used on display.
If this words are less than the “Word Count (de-
5 fault)”, some words may not be able to display.
Translation is needed for the missing wording.
Word Count (default) The number of words the software uses.
PCL
PS3 (PS3 option)
PDF (PDF direct print option) Optional items status
6 BC (Barcode font option) (Yes: Equipped, No: Not equipped)
CY (Cyrillic font)
CF
PPM Print pages per minute.
3. Press [Close] to exit the display life monitor.
3-99

3.12.2 Printer Test
The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below.
Checkered Squares Paper Scum
Halftone Halftone2 White Black
Ladder LED Head Test 6% Pattern
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Test Pattern Print].
2. Select the desired pattern is displayed.
3-100

3. Select a cassette or tray that holds your desired paper size to test, and press [Enter].
4. Enter the numbers of pages to print and press [Enter].
5. Press [Yes].
The selected pattern will be printed continuously.
Press <Stop> to stop printing.
3.12.3 Feeder test

The feeder test discharges all documents in the automatic document feeder (ADF) at a constant
speed and displays the document total in the LCD.
1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF).

2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Feeder Test].
3. Press [Start] to start the feeder test.
4. Press [End] to exit the test mode.
3-101

3.12.4 Port Status
This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3.12.5 Set Background Level

The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a
scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced;
therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed.
The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Background level].

2. Select the scanner to adjust. On MFX-2550, only [Front] is available.
3. Press [Start].
After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the ready screen.
3.12.6 Make color Gamma

The machine has a color gamma data table as color scanning correction data. The color gamma table
adjusts RGB color balance, and is unique per machine because of the optical variation. Both the main
board and compact flash memory card on the network board keep the color gamma table, and the
same data will be saved on both parts when you make a color data though below operation.
Perform this operation to remake the color gamna table when the following parts is replaced:
• Lamp
• Inverter
• Main board and compact flash memory card (replaced at the same time)
Either of the following chart is requied to make the color Gamma:

2007-01 No.20071020
NOTE
Use a clean chart that is not tanned or folder.
3-102

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Make Color Gamma].
3. Set the chart on FBS (Flat Bed Scanner), and press [Make for FBS].
(Set the chart so that scanning starts from the chart top.)
4. Set the chart on ADF, and press [Make ADF/F] or [Make ADF/B]. On MFX-2550, [Make ADF/B] is
not available.
(Set the chart so that scanning starts from the chart top.)
5. Press [Close] to go back to test function menu.
3.12.7 Select color Gamma

The machine has a color gamma data table as color scanning correction data. A same color gamma
table is kept on the main board and compact flash memory card on the network board. When one of
the board is replaced, perform the following operation to remake the table on the other.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Select Color Gamma].
2. Select the source to be copied.
Select [CF] when the main board is replaced, and [MFP] when the compact flash memory card is
replaced.
3. Press [Yes].
4. Check the LCD that “Yes” is displayed at both “Unit” and “CF”.
3-103

3.13 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and
Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique
switch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0>.

2. Select [ON] to enable duplex printing, or [OFF] to disable it.
3.14 Factory Functions

This function provides several machine machina test.
Test list
Test Contents
LED test Light on all the LED lamps to check that the lamps are working.
LCD test Display test patterns on the LCD to check for dead pixel.
Panel test Display the key name on the LCD when the key is pressed.
You can check that the keys are working.
SRAM check Check that the SRAM is working in case that the registered fax
numbers turn into garbage.
DRAM check Check that the DRAM is working correctly.
Check also when the memory is expanded.
RTC test Factory use only.
Page memory check Check that the page memory is working in case that the print im-
ages are wrong.
Pseudo ring test Check the bell of external telephone and the pseudo ring.
Serial number writing Factory use only.
3-104

3.14.1 LED Test
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LED Test].
2. Press <Start>.
Every time you press <Start> the LED illuminates in the following order:
Green  Red  Blue  All LEDs ON  All LEDs OFF
3. Press <Stop> to complete the test.
3.14.2 LCD Test

This mode displays three test patterns in LCD.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LCD Test].
2. Press <Start> to turn all dots off.
3. Press <Start> to turn all dots on.
4. Press <Start> to display letters.
5. Press <Stop> to complete the test.
3-105

3.14.3 Key Panel Test
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Panel Test].
2. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table will be dis-
played.
Key Indication in LCD Key Indication in LCD

Copy Copy Personal Mode Personal
Scan Scan Job Confirm /Fax Job Confirm /Fax Cancel
Cancel
Fax Fax Reset Reset
Print Print Numeric keys 1 to Tenkey 1 to 0, *, #
10, *, #
My MFP My MFP Stop Stop
Screen 1 to Screen4 Screen 1 to Screen4 Start Start
Setting Settings Energy Save Energy Save
Login Login
3. Press <Stop> twice to complete the key panel test.
3.14.4 SRAM Check

This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time, TTI,
etc are stored.
The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique
switches to factory defaults.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “SRAM Check”.

2. Press <Start>.
The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If the read/
write test is successful, the display will show “OK”.
If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show “NG” with the address and the data name.
3. Press [Close] to complete the SRAM Check.
3-106

3.14.5 DRAM Check
This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [DRAM Check].

2. Enter the test data.
3. Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit, press <0>.

4. Press [Start].
The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
5. Press [Close] to complete the DRAM Check.
3.14.6 RTC(real time clock) Test

3.14.7 Page memory check

When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Page Memory check].
3. Select the desired checking area. On MFX-2550, only [Scanner front memory area] is available.
4. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (see “3.18 DRAM Clear”), and then go back to step 1.
5. Press [Close] to complete the page memory check.
3-107

3.14.8 Pseudo ring test
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Pseudo ring test].
2. Press [Start], to ring the bell.
3. Press [End] to stop.

4. Press [Close] to complete the pseudo ring test.
3.14.9 Serial number writing

3-108

3.15 Line Tests
This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are
relay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.
NOTE
To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack.
3.15.1 Relay Test

This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Select [Relay].
4. Select the relay you want to test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
CML relay – on DP relay – on L relay – on RI relay – on

CML relay – off DP relay – off L relay –off RI relay – off
S relay – on H relay – on CONT24V relay – on Hook key
S relay – off H relay –off CONT24V relay – off
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.
3-109

3.15.2 Tonal Signal Test
The tonal signal test permits the unit’s output tones to be monitored.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Press [Tonal].
3. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below.

Signal Signal
None (stop signal) V17_2400_7200_W1_B4 picture date
400 Hz tone V17_2400_7200_W0_B1 picture date
FSK WHITE V17_2400_12000_W1_B0 picture date
FSK BLACK V17_2400_12000_W1_B1 picture date
FSK _W1_B1 V17_2400_12000_W1_B4 picture date
V27_1200_2400 picture date V17_2400_12000_W0_B1 picture date
V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B4 picture date
V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W0_B1 picture date
V17_2400_14400_W4_B1 picture date
Signal
V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600
V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400
V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800
V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200
V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.
NOTE
It may take several moments for output signal to change.
3-110

3.15.3 DTMF Output Test
The DTMF output test permits the unit’s DTMF tones to be monitored.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Select [DTMF].
3. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Display Signal Display Signal

0 DTMF0 (941 Hz + 1336 Hz) ROW1 ROW1 (697 Hz)
4 DTMF4 (770 Hz + 1209 Hz) COL1 COL1 (1209 Hz)
8 DTMF8 (852 Hz + 1336 Hz)
9 DTMF9 (852 Hz + 1477 Hz)
* (AST) DTMF6* (941 Hz + 1209 Hz)
# DTMF# (941 Hz + 1477 Hz)
(SHARP)
4. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press <Stop>.

5. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 3-4.
Otherwise, proceed to step 6.
6. To exit the DTMF output test, press [Close] under not tests.
NOTE
It may take several moments for output signal to change.
3-111

3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode
IMPORTANT
The machine is shipped with mirror carriage locked to protect the machine’s mirror carriage during
shipping. When installing the machine, slide the scanner locking lever back to its unlocking posi-
tion. Then turn the power on and perform the following:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4> .

2. Select [OFF].
3. Select the energy save mode start time.

If you chose [No], the setting adjustment is complete.
No Low power mode : 1 minute
Sleep mode : 1 minute
Yes Low power mode : 15 minutes
Sleep mode : 60 minutes
4. Select [Yes] to change the energy save mode start time.
IMPORTANT
If reshipping, turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then Press
<Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4>, and [OFF].
3-112

3.17 Consumable order sheet
When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine
prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.
1 Dealer’s fax number 16 Dealer’s name

2 Customer’s name 17 Dealer’s code
3 Customer’s department 18 Dealer’s telephone number
4 Customer’s address 1 (Upper line) 19 Dealer’s fax number
5 Customer’s address 2 (Lower line) 20 Dealer’s e-mail address
6 Customer’s account 21 Comment *1
7 Customer’s telephone number 22 Place of the customer write his/her
signature *1
8 Customer’s fax number registered by 23 Drum used percentage
Initial setting mode (Setting, User Install).
9 Customer’s e-mail address 24 Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds)
10 Serial number of the unit 25 Drum life time
11 Order item 26 Drum used percentage
12 Description of the order item 27 Total print pages
13 Quantity of the order item 28 Number of print pages after toner bottle
or drum unit was replaced.
14 Payment options *1 29 ROM version
15 Date of payment *1
*1 These items should be entered manually.
3-113

3.17.1 Set consumable order sheet
1. Clear the junk data, if necessary.
2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
3. Press [Order Sheet].
4. Press [Dealer Code].
5. Enter the Dealer’s code and press [Enter].

The code may be up to 10 characters in length.
6. Press [Dealer Name].

7. Enter the Dealer’s name (Supplier’s name) and press [Enter].
The name may be up to 30 characters in length.
3-114

8. Press [Dealer Tel No].
9. Enter the distributor’s telephone number and press [Enter].
The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
10. Press [Dealer Fax No].

11. Enter the dealer’s fax number and press [Enter].
The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length.
12. Press [Dealer e-mail].

13. Enter the dealer’s e-mail address and press [Enter].
The e-mail address may be up to 50 characters in length.
14. Press [Cust Account #].

15. Enter the customer’s account number and press [Enter].
The customer’s account number may be up to 10 characters in length.
3-115

16. Press [Cust Name].
17. Enter the customer’s account number and press [Enter].
18. Press [Client department].

19. Enter the customer’s department and press .
20. Press [Address 1].

21. Enter the customer’s address for the upper row and press [Enter].
The customer’s address may be up to 50 characters in length.
22. Press [Address2].

23. Enter the customer’s address for the lower row.
The customer’s address may be up to 50 characters in length.
3-116

24. Press [Cust Tel].
25. Enter the customer’s phone number.
The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
26. Press [Price].

27. Enter the price of toner cartridge and press [Enter].
28. Press [Order Sheet Setting].

29. Select the way to deal with the consumable order sheet when the printer consumable is near end of its
designed life.
If “OFF” is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even though the
printer consumable is near end of its designed life.
30. When you have selected [e-mail] in step 27, press [e-mail Subject].
31. Enter the subject when sending the consumable order sheet, and press [Enter].
32. Press [Close] to exit the order sheet setting.
3-117

3.17.2 Clear consumable order sheet
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select [Clear Order Sheet].
3. Press [Yes].
3.17.3 Print consumable order sheet

To check the customer’s information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select [Order Sheet List].
3-118

3.18 DRAM Clear
This clears the image storage memory.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6>.
2. Press [Yes].
3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.
3.19 Life monitor maintenance

3.19.1 Resettable counter clearing
Clear the counter of the machine. The following counter will be cleared:
• Scanned pages per mode (copy/scan/fax/print)
• Scanned times per mode (copy/scan/fax)
• Pages per scanner part (ADF/FBS)
• Times per scanner part (ADF/FBS)
• Scanner jam information
• Print pages per cassette
• Jammed pages per cassette
• Jammed pages per print part
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
2. Select [Initialize resettable counter].
3. Press [Yes].
3.19.2 Reentering the life monitor

Your machine maintains the life monitor value on the main control board. When the main control board
is replaced, reenter the life monitor.
• Number of drum replacement : Number of times drum cartridge is replaced

• Drum Rotation Time : Time how long the drum has rotated (x 10 seconds)
• Number of pages after drum replaced : Print pages on current drum cartridge
• Number of pages after drum caution : Print pages after the “Drum near end” caution is displayed
• Number of toner replacements : Number of times toner cartridge is replaced
• Toner Rotation Time : Time how long the agitator has rotated (x 10 seconds)
• Number of pages after toner replaced : Print pages on current toner cartridge
• Number of pages after toner caution : Print pages after the “Toner almost empty” caution is displayed
• Fuser Replaced Count: Number of times fuser is replaced
• Fuser Life : Time how long current fuser is working (x 10 seconds)
• Transfer Replaced Count: Number of times transfer roller is replaced
3-119

• Transfer Life : Time how long current transfer roller is working (x 10 seconds)
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
2. Press [Number of drum replacements].

3. Enter the value and press [Enter].
4. Press [Drum Rotation Time].

6. Press [Number of pages after drum replaced].
8. Press [Number of pages after drum caution].
10. Press [Number of toner replacements].
12. Press [Toner Rotation Time].
14. Press [Number of pages after toner replaced].
16. Press [Number of pages after toner caution].
18. Press [Fuser Replaced Count].
20. Press [Fuser Life].
22. Press [Transfer Replaced Count].
24. Press [Transfer Life].
26. Press [Close].
3-120

3.20 Sensor input test
This mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor name
changes from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. For example, when open the paper cassette 1, the
CAS1:OFF change to CAS1: ON.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2>.
2. Press either [Scanner Sensor Status] or [Printer Sensor Status].
Scanner Sensor Status

Name Status Name Status
TXIL OFF: Scanner cover is open HS OFF: Mirror outer than HS
ON: Scanner cover is close ON: Mirror inner than HS
DS1 OFF: No document DS2 OFF: No document
ON: Document existing ON: Document existing
DS3 * OFF: No document APS OFF: Platen cover is open
ON: Document existing ON: Platen cover is closed
DRS * OFF: No document
ON: Document existing
*: DS3 and DRS are always “OFF” on MFX-2550.
Printer Sensor Status

Name Status Name Status
THRM Show the temperature of Heater TEMP Show the internal temperature of
roller. machine.
BAT Show the voltage of the SDRAM
backup battery.
TS1 Show the remaining toner level. TS2 Show the remaining toner level.
HP No sensor on this machine
PSS OFF: No paper PDS OFF: No paper
ON: Detect paper ON: Detect paper jam
SWBK OFF: No paper
ON: Detect paper
DRNW OFF: Drum new DREX OFF: No drum
ON: Drum used ON: Detect drum
DVNW OFF: Developing unit new
ON: Developing unit used
CAS1 OFF: Cassette 1 is close PES1 OFF: No paper in cassette 1
ON: Cassette is open ON: Detect paper is cassette 1
SIDE_OP OFF: Side cover 1 is close
ON: Side cover 1 is open
CAS2 OFF: Cassette 2 is close PES2 OFF: No paper in cassette 2
ON: Cassette 2 is open ON: Detect paper is cassette 2
JAM2_OP OFF: Side cover 2 is close
ON: Side cover 2 is open
CASM OFF: Bypass tray is close PES2 OFF: No paper on bypass tray
ON: Bypass tray is open ON: Detect paper on bypass tray
FRNT_OP OFF: Front cover is close
ON: Front cover is open
NOTE
CAS2, PES2 and JAM2_OP do not change, when there is no second cassette attached.
3-121

3.21 Printer diagnostic mode
This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3>.
2. Select the device you want to set to ON.

Fan Full : Rotate the fan motor with full power
Rx Motor : Rotate the Rx motor
Dup Dir CW : Rotate the Duplex Motor clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
Mup Mtr : Rotate the duplex motor
Shift Mtr : Rotate the shift motor. This is not available for MFX-2550.
Clutch 1 : Turn on clutch of cassette 1
Clutch 2 : Turn on clutch of cassette 2
Man Clutch : Rotate Bypass tray feed clutch
Reg Clutch : Turn on Register roller clutch
ALL OFF : Turn the all device to off
3.Press the key once again will turn the device off.
Press [All OFF] to turn all device off at once.
4. Press [Close] to exit.
3-122

3.22 Network service mode
This mode provides the following two items:
• Delete Administrator's password
• Initialize Authentication method
3.22.1 Delete Administator’s password

You can clear the administator's password.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. Press [Delete Manager].
3. Press [Yes].
3.22.2 Initialize Authentication Method

You can initialize the authentication mode, and return it to its factory default (Stand-alone).
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. Press [Initialize Authentication Method].
3. Press [Yes].
3-123

3.23 Flash Rom Sum Check
This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9> .
2. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.
3.24 Set Service Report

3.24.1 Set the service report
If using this feature, you should be enter following items:
• Destinations – Where to send the service report. Up to three fax numbers or 2 e-mail
adrdresses can be registered.
• Report format – Select between simple report or detailed report.
• Period – The report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month on
a determined date and time.
1. Press <Setting>, <4>, <2>.

2. Press [Setting].
3. Press [Send Service Report].
3-124

4. Select [Fax] or [E-mail], and press [Enter].
5. When you have selected [Fax] in step 4, press [Fax Number 1] and then [ON].
When you have selected [E-mail] in step 4, press [E-mail Address 1].
6. Confirm the destination, and press [Enter].
Edit the fax number or e-mail address, if necessary.
7. If you want to send the service report to other destinations, press [Fax Number 2], [E-mail Address
2] or [E-mail Address 3] and enter the destinations.
8. Press [Report Format].
9. Select the report format, and press [Enter].
10. Press [Period].

11. Select the period, and press [Enter].
3-125

12. When you have selected [Interval] in step 11, enter the sending interval and press [Enter].
When you have selected [Monthly] in step 11, enter the sending date and time (24-hour format)
and press [Enter].
14. When you have selected [Fax] in step 4, press [Close].

When you have selected [E-mail] in step 4, press [E-mail Subject].
15. Enter the e-mail subject when sending the service report, and press [Enter].
16. Press [Close].
3.24.2 Print the service report

To clear the information of service report:
1. Press <Setting>, <4>, <2>.
2. Press [Service Report].
3.25 Printer registration adjustment

This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source.
For more detail, see “5.3 Adjustment”.
3-126

3.26 Reset printer trouble
This mode clears the service call. Clear the warning when the trouble is settled. If fuser warming up
error is settled, turn the machine OFF and ON following this operation.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <5>.
2. Press [Yes].
3. Turn the power OFF and then ON.
3.27 Cleaning mode

This mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface
of them.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <6>.

2. Select the roller to rotate, and press [ON].
3. Press [Start] to rotate the roller.
3-127

3.28 Key counter mode
This function is for “Foreign Device Interface” option). If you have attached the key counter to the
machine activate this mode to let it count the printed-paper.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <0>.

2. Press [ON] and then [Close].
3.29 Network switch mode

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <1>.
2. Press [Parameter Edit].
When you press [Parameter Clear] and then [Yes], all the parameters return to their default value.
3. Call up the desired parameter by pressing [ ] or [ ] , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
3-128

5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:

6. If you want to set other parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
You can confirm the initial setting of each parameter by the Network Switch List.
The Network Switch List will be printed by pressing [Parameter Print].
Network switch 000: Factory use only
Network switch 001:

Initial
Setting
7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 1 IP address flag Choose which to use as HELE/EHLO command
0 : Send Internet fax charac- parameter.
ter strings
1 : Send IP address
Network switch 002:

Initial
Setting
7 0 Maximum session times of Set up the maximum session times. The number
6 0 SMTP between 1 to 32 are available.
5 0
4 0 00011111 32 times
:
3 0
00001001 10 times
2 0 :
1 0 00000001 2 times
0 0 00000000 1 time (default)
3-129

Network switch 003:
Initial
Setting
7 0 Number of retry times for Set up the retry times for archive transmission.
6 0 archive transmission This setting is adopted for the following transmission
5 0 when an available destination is set.
4 0 • Transmission to a shared folder
• E-mail transmission
3 1
2 1 11111111 255 times
1 1 :
0 1 00001111 15 times (default)
:
00000001 1 time
00000000 No transmission
Network switch 004:

Initial
Setting
7 0 Internet Fax dialing interval 11111111 255 seconds
6 0 :
5 0 00111100 60 seconds
4 0 :
00000010 2 seconds
3 0
00000001 1 second
2 0 00000000 3 seconds (default)
1 0
0 0
Network switch 005 ~ 006: Factory use only
Network switch 007:

Initial
Setting
7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 0 Print banner page on LPD When you set this switch to “1”, the banner page is
protocol not printed on LPD protocol even when the printer
0: Yes receives the print command.
1: No
3-130

Network switch 008:
Initial
Setting
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 0 Send Host name (Option 12) Send Host name (Option 12) to DHCP server when
to DHCP server acquiring IP address. If DHCP server is configured
0: Yes on dynamic updates, it registers the host name to
1: No the DNS server.
0 0 Send FQDN (Option 81) to Send FQDN (Option 81) to DHCP server when
DHCP server acquiring
0: Yes IP address. If DHCP server is configured on
1: No dynamic updates, it registers the FQDN to the DNS
server.
Network switch 011:

Initial
Setting
7 0 Synchronizing interval 11111111 255 minutes
6 0 of internettime between :
5 0 machine and SNTP server 00111100 60 minutes
4 0 :
00000010 2 minutes
3 0
00000001 1 minute
2 0 00000000 15 minutes (default)
1 0
0 0
Network switch 012:

Initial
Setting
7 0 Maximum permissible hours When the difference in machine and SNTP server
6 0 of difference in machine and is smaller than the set value, the machine does not
5 0 SNTP server refresh the time.
4 0
00011000 24 hours
3 0
:
2 0 00000010 2 hours
1 0 00000001 1 hour
0 0 00000000 Alwayss refreshes time (default)
3-131

Network switch 017:
Initial
Setting
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 0 Error mail judgement Set whether to judge a received e-mail with a
0 : Judges as error mail header that has only <> in “Return-Path” as error
1 : Not judge as error mail mail.
When it is judged as error mail, only the first page of
that e-mail text will be processed.
3-132

3.30 Touch panel adjustment
Correct the X, Y on the touch panel.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <6>.

2. Touch the left upper corner of the display, and press <Start>.
3. Touch the right bottom corner of the display, and press <Start>.
3.31 Printer control parameter mode

The following two settings are available for the optional print controller is attached:
• Synchronize cassette designation command and paper size designation command to HP (Switch 27)
• Change barcode font width (Switch 28)
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <7>.
2. Select [Parameter Edit], and press [Enter].
When you press [Parameter Clear] and then [Yes], all the parameters return to their default value.
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ]or[ ],or by pressing the numeric keypad.
5. Adjust the parameter, and press [Enter].
To navigate through the machine parameter settings:
• Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.
6. If you want to set other parameter, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
3-133

Printer control parameter 000 ~ 026 : Factory use only
Printer control parameter 027 :

Initial
bit Adjust Usage/Comments
Setting
7 - Factory use only
1 0 Cassette designation Some default cassette designation commands differ from
command those of HP. (See table below.)
0: Default To use HP command, set this bit to "1".
1: HP
0 0 Paper size designation Some default paper size designation commands differ
command from those of HP. (See table below.)
0: Default To use HP command, set this bit to "1".
1: HP
PCL5 PCLXL
Cassette
Default HP Default HP
Auto 7 7 1 1
Bypass tray 2 2 2 2
Cassette 1 1 4 4 3
Cassette 2 4 1 5 4
Cassette 3 5 5 6 5
PCL5 PCLXL
Paper size
Default HP Default HP
Letter 2 2 0 0
Ledger 6 6 4 4
Legal 3 3 1 1
Executive 1 1 3 3
A3 27 27 5 5
A4 26 26 2 2
A5 25 25 16 16
A6 24 24 17 17
F4 114 114 19 -
B4(JIS) 46 46 10 10
B5(JIS) 45 45 11 11
B5 100 100 12 12
B6(JIS) 44 44 18 18
Half Letter 102 102 20 -
COM10 81 81 6 6
Monarch 80 80 7 7
DL 90 90 9 9
Postcard 71 71 14 14
D. Postcard 72 72 15 15
C5 91 91 8 8
Custom 101 101 - -
8K 115 115 21 19
16K 116 116 22 20
Chyou4 117 117 23 -
Kaku2 118 118 24 -
-: No corresponding command
3-134

Printer control parameter 028 :
Initial
bit Adjust Usage/Comments
Setting
7 0 Change barcode font Change barcode fonts wider or narrower by step.
6 0 width The steps are from 7 to -7, but some fonts are limited in
5 0 available steps. And some fonts cannot be changed. For
4 0 details, see table below.
3 0
2 0 10000111 Narrower
1 0 :
10000100
:
00000000 Selected font
:
0 0 00000100
:
00000111 Wider
Code 128
1 Code 128 Condensed Narrow
2 Code 128 Condensed Bold
3 Code 128
4 Code 128 Bold
5 Code 128 Expanded
6 Code 128 Expanded Bold Wide
Code 39
1 BC 3of9 Thin Narrow
2 BC 3of9 Light
3 BC 3of9
4 BC 3of9 Semi
5 BC 3of9 Heavy
Wide
Codabar
1 Codabar Condensed Narrow
2 Codabar
3 Codabar Expanded
Wide
I2of5
1 Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Light Narrow
2 Interleaved 2of5 Light
3 Interleaved 2of5 Narrow
4 Interleaved 2of5
5 Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Semi
6 Interleaved 2of5 Semi
7 Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Bold
8 Interleaved 2of5 Bold Wide
Upc
1 UPC/EAN Condensed Narrow
2 UPC/EAN
3 UPC/EAN Condensed Bold
4 UPC/EAN Bold
5 UPC/EAN Expanded
6 UPC/EAN Expanded Bold Wide
Printer control parameter 029 ~ 099 : Factory use only
3-135

3.32 Network capture (Packet capture)
You can capture the packet data the machine has sent and received, and download it from the web browser
or sent it to an e-mail address. When you read the data using a packet analyzing tool such “tcpdump”, you
can use it as a subsidiary tool to detect the cause of transmission problem.
There are two ways to capture the packet data: capturing from web browser and from the machine control
panel.
3.32.1 Capturing packet data from the web browser

1. Start the web browser on computer.
2. Type the machine’s IP address in the URL address field followed by “/service”.
e.g. http://192.168.1.10/service
3. Enter login ID and password.

ID : muratec
Password : service
4. Click [Network Capture].

5. Enter the “Capture Parameter”. Refer to “Setting details” if needed.
6. Enter the “Output Method”. Refer to “Setting details” if needed.

7. Click [Save].
8. Click [Capture Start].
9. Press [File Tx] when capturing has finished.
NOTE
When sending the capture data has succeeded, the captured data will be deleted automatically. When
you do not send the captured data, press [File Delete] to delete them.
3-136

3.32.2 Capturing packet data from machine control panel
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <8>.
2. Press [Capture Settings].
3. Set up the detailed capture setting. Refer to “Setting details” if needed.
4. Press [Tx Method].

5. Press [Transmission Method].
6. Select the method, and press [Enter].

7. Press either [e-mail Settings], [Folder Setting] or [FTP Settings] and enter the destination. Refer to “Setting
details” if needed
8. Press [Close].
9. Press [Capture].
10. Press [Send] when the capture has finished.
NOTE
When sending the capture data has succeeded, the captured data will be deleted automatically. When
you do not send the captured data, press [Delete] to delete them.
3-137

3.32.3 Setting details
The following settings are available for capturing packets:
Target All Host : To capture the packets between the machine and all hosts, select this.
Specific Host : To capture the packets between the machine and specific host, se-
lect this. Enter the host name in the “Host” field”. You can enter only
IP address when you enter it from the machine control panel.
Protocol Select the protocol to capture. You can select multiple protocols.
Port / Service Enter the port number or service name to capture. If this field is empty, all ports and
services are captured. You can enter only port numbers when you enter it from the
machine control panel.
Port number entering sample : 21, 80, 88
Service name entering sample: ftp, http, kerberos
# of Packet Enter the number of packets to capture. When this field is not entered, capturing
does not complete.
You can enter number from 64 to 20,000.
Packet Size Enter how much bites to retrieve from one packet.
You can enter number from 1 to 1514 bites.
Free Set up optional “tcpdump” items.
However the following parapmeters will be ignored even when they are entered:
-w : save file
-c : number of packets
-s : Each capture size from one packet
This field is not available from the machine control panel.
Enter either of the following three output method:

Mail Enter the e-mail address to send the data by e-mail. The address book is not avail-
able.
Folder Enter the folder path, account and password to send the data to a shared folder.
Folder shortcuts are not available.
FTP Enter the FTP server folder path, account and password to send the data to a FTP
server. The shortcuts are not available.
3-138

3.33 Storage maintenance
The storage on the OfficeBridge is a Compact Flash (CF) memory card. The following operations are avail-
able with this function:
Disable CF Storage : Permanently disables the CF card from being read to prevent data from being ac-
cessed when the unit is disposed.
Resetting Storage : Initializes the CF card. The data in the CF card will be erased and the card will be
reformatted. This function can be useful when data on the CF card is corrupted
and causing the machine to malfunction.
3.33.1 Erasing storage
CAUTION
When you perform this operation, the CF memory card cannot be recovered through “Resetting Storage”
or any other operations.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9>.

2. Press [Disable CF Storage].
3. Press [Yes].
3-139

3.33.2 Resetting storage
To reuse the CF memory card, perform “3.41 Update the software” and reinstall the program after this
operation.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9>.

2. Press [Storage Reset].
3. Press [Yes].
4. The machine reboots from itself.
3.33.3. How to upgrade your OfficeBridge memory

When you upgrade the CF memory card, the settings and image data will not be copied to the new card
automatically. Follow the procedures described bellow:
1. Backup the image data in the CF memory card to a network folder using the “Document Backup” function
on OfficeBridge.
For details, refer to the OfficeBridge Guide section 3, “Backing Up Documents”.
2. Set Unique switch 082 bit 6 to “1”.
3. Export the machine settings to a USB memory using the “Mirroring” function on the control panel.
For details, refer to the Administrator’s Guide section 2, “Mirroring the Machine Settings”.
4. Replace the CF memory card to the new one.
5. When you restart the machine, you will be asked for the administrator’s password. Enter the password.
(See “3.33.4 About Storage replacement operation”.)
6. Import the machine settings from the USB memory using the “Mirroring” function.
7. Reset Unique switch 082 bit 6 to “0”.
You cannot import the image data to the new CF memory card. The backup image data will be displayed
on OfficeBridge when the “Backup Document Display” function is enabled. For details, refer to OfficeBridge
Guide section 3, “Specifying the Backup Document Display”.
3.33.4 About Storage replacement operation

In the following cases, the display asks you to enter the Administrator’s password. In such cases, enter the
Administrator password of the former device.
• When CF memory card used by another machine is attached.
• When CF memory card is removed and updated.
• When either the main control board or the network board is replaced.
• When unique switch 82 bit 6 is set to “1” and the machine setting data are imported.
3-140

3.34 Coverage Rate
You can set the toner coverage rate of paper. This will be the base to calculate the toner consumption of the
users.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <6>, <0>.
2. Enter the coverage rate, and press [Enter].
3.35 Service function menu

All the field service modes are available from the menu.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <7>, <7>.
2. Select the desired service function to use.
3-141

3.36 Wire cleaning warning
This mode makes to display the cleaning warning for drum charge wire an print head in a certain interval
(hour=drum rotation).
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <8>, <6>.
2. Press [ON].
3. Input the interval in hour, and press [Enter].
3.37 Installing language

You can install, edit or delete languages on the machine that is prepared in an USB memory.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <1>.

2. Connect the USB memory on which the language data is stored.
3. Press [Add].
To edit an installed language, select a language and press [Edit].

To delete an installed language, select a language and press [Delete], [Yes]. A default install language
cannot be deleted.
4. Press the box next to “Panel”.,
5. Browse the file and press [Enter].

6. Press the box next to “WebUl”.
7. Browse the file and press [Enter].
8. Click [Add].
The added language will be displayed in “Language” menu (<Setting>  [Management] [User Install]).
When you select the installed language, machine prompts you to reboot the machine.
3-142

3.38 Counter information maintenance
The machine has the counter data saved on both the SRAM (main control panel) and CF memory card (net-
work board) with its serial number connected. If for some reasons these two serial numbers do not match,
maintenance the data manually.
NOTE
The maintenance screen is normally displayed when the machine is turned on. Follow step 2. To mainte-
nance the data manually, start operation from step 1.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <3>.

2. Check both counter data on main control board and network board.
To copy the counter data from SRAM (main control panel) to CF memory card (network board), press
[MainCopy.]
To copy the counter data from CF memory card (network board) to SRAM (main control panel), press
[OB Copy.]
3.39 Asset Number

This mode is used to input the asset number. You can also input the asset number from the web screen. (See
page 3-160.)
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <5>.
2. Input asset number, and press [Enter].
3-143

3.40 Quick Initial settings
At installation of this machine, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures.
You can do the following setting with continuously.
1. Initial settings
2. Consumable order sheet settings
3. Service Report settings
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9>.
See following pages, how to set-up each mode:

Initial setting : See “Scanner and Fax Guide”.
Consumable order sheet : See “3.17 Consumable order sheet” on page 3-113.
3.41 Update the software

There are three choices to update the ROM:
• Using the USB memory
• Using the Network (operating through control panel)
• Using the Network (operating through web browser) (See page 3-158.)
There are three types of flash ROM to update:

• Main ROM
• Network ROM
• PCL ROM
In following cases, software cannot be updated. Check the machine in advance:

• The machine is in operation (scanning, printing, or sending fax etc.)
• The memory is in use by delayed transmission or for other reasons.
CAUTION
Do not turn the power off while updating the software. Doing so may damage the main control board.
3.41.1 Updating the software using an USB memory

Update the machine software using an ROM data prepared in an USB memory. You can either update it
automatically to the latest version : “Auto Update”, or to the desired version by selecting the ROM version
manually : “Manual Update”.
3-144

Auto Update
To update the ROM automatically, create a “Boot” folder to the root directory of USB memory, and save the
data there under folders with names under the following rules:
USB flash memory
Boot
Machine 2550USA
2550USA_Ver.txt
2550_USA_xxxxxx_update.bin
OB750
Network
OB750_Ver.txt
OB750_xxxxxx.zip
FWUD.bin
PCL OP700EN
OP700EN_Ver.txt
OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin
• “xxxxxx” indicates the ROM version. For example : A0A0A0
• “2550” indicates machine name. When you use MFX-2570, replace it to “2570”.
• Save a text file with the latest version name and the firmware under the folder with the firmware type name.
• The text file should have a name with the firmware type followed by country code :USA, then an “_”(under-
score) and “Ver”.
An example for machine ROM text file: 2550USA_Ver.txt
• The firmware should have a name with the firmware type followed by an “_”(underscore), then the country
code :USA, an “_”(underscore), and the ROM version. Machine ROM should also have the string “update”
following an “_”(underscore).
An example for machine firmware : 2550_USA_A0A0A0_update.bin
• Following are the firmware types and their names:
Firmware type Name
Machine ROM 2550 or 2570
Network (OfficeBridge) OB750
PCL OP700
NOTE
Save only one firmware in each folder. Auto Update is not available when two or more firmware are
stored.
1 Turn off the machine.

2 Connect the USB memory in which the firmware is stored.
3 Turn the machine on to start update.
4 When the display shows “Firmware Updating OK”, turn the machine OFF and ON.
5 Press <My MFP> and check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded.
3-145

Manual update
Updating the ROM manually either by selecting the latest ROM version or by selecting the desired version.
Two or more ROM data can be saved on an USB memory.
USB flash memory
Boot
2550USA
Machine 2550USA
2550USA_Ver.txt
OB750
Network
OB750_Ver.txt
OB750_xxxxxx.zip
FWUD.bin
PCL OP700EN
OP700EN_Ver.txt
OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin
See "Auto Update" for the saving and naming rules of folders and data.
1 Connect the USB memory in which the firmware is stored.

2 Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>
3 Press [Update from the USB].
3-146

4 Press either [Update to the latest version] or [Specify with specified version].
5 Select the ROM type and ROM version to update, and press [Enter].
When [Update to the latest version] is pressed, select the ROM type to update. The selected ROM
type will be highlighted.
When [Specify with specified version] is pressed, select the ROM type and enter the ROM version.
6 Press [Update].
7 Press [Yes] and the updating starts.
8 When the display shows “Firmware Updating OK”, turn the machine OFF and ON.
3-147

3.41.2 Updating the software using the network
Update the machine software using an ROM data prepared on a network location. You can either update it
automatically to the latest version, or to the desired version by selecting the ROM version manually.
Store the ROM data on a network location in advance.
a network folder
Machine 2550USA
2550USA_Ver.txt
OB750
Newtwork
OB750_Ver.txt
OB750_xxxxxx.zip
FWUD.bin
PCL OP700EN
OP700EN_Ver.txt
OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin
• “xxxxxx” indicates the ROM version. For example : A0A0A0
• “2550” indicates machine name. When you use MFX-2570, replace it to “2570”.
• Save a text file with the latest version name and the firmware under the folder with the firmware type name.
• The text file should have a name with the firmware type followed by country code :USA, then an “_”(under-
score) and “Ver”.
An example for machine ROM text file: 2550USA_Ver.txt
• The firmware should have a name with the firmware type followed by an “_”(underscore), then the country
code :USA, an “_”(underscore), and the ROM version. Machine ROM should also have the string “update”
following an “_”(underscore).
An example for machine firmware : 2550_USA_A0A0A0_update.bin
• Following are the firmware types and their names:
Firmware type Name
Machine ROM 2550 or 2570
Network (OfficeBridge) OB750
PCL OP700
3-148

1 Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>
2 Press [Update from the network].
3 Press [Specifying Server].

This step is needed only at the first time. When once the setting is registered, skip to step 5.
4 Enter the Protocol, Path, Account, Password, Proxy Server, and Proxy Port, and press [Close].
5 Press either [Update to the latest version] or [Specify with specified version].
6 Select the ROM type and ROM version to update, and press [Enter].
When [Update to the latest version] is pressed, select the ROM type to update. The selected ROM type
will be highlighted.
When [Specify with specified version] is pressed, select the ROM type and enter the ROM version.
7 Press [Update].
8 Press [Yes] and the updating starts.
9 When updating is finished, turn the machine OFF and ON.
NOTE
The setting you entered at step 4 will only be saved when you continue the updating steps until step 8.
When you cancel the steps, the setting will not be saved.
3-149

3.41.3 About error
If an error occurred during updating, a five-digit error code will be displayed. The first digit indicates the ROM
type, the rest indicates the cause of the error.
ROM type
Code ROM type
1 Main
3 Network
4 PCL
0 Could not specify
Error cause
Code Cause / Countermeasure
1000 General error.
1020 Start error detected.
1030 Could not find the ROM file. Check the specified file.
1040 USB memory read error. Check the USB memory is working correctly.
1050 Network board read error. Check the network boar is working correctly.
1060
1070 File read error. Check that the ROM file are stored correctly.
1080
1200 The machine is in use. Update when the machine and the memory are free.
1400 Could not find the ROM file. Check the specified file.
2030 Unable to update. Check the main control board is working correctly.
Start error (1020)

The datailed errror code will be displayed when you press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>. The four-digit numbers
in the parenthesis is the detailed errors for start error.
Third digite error code

0020 Fax is in use. (Reserved communications are existing.)
0080 Memory is in use.
00A0 Fax and memory are in use.
Last digite error code

0000 No information
0001 Machine is operating.
0002 Machine is printing.
0003 Machine is operating and printing.
0004 Machine is scanning.
0005 Machine is printing and scanning.
0006 Machine is operating and scanning.
0007 Machine is operating, printing, and scanning.
0008 Machine is communicating.
3-150

0009 Machine is operating and communicating.
000A Machine is printing and communicating.
000B Machine is operating, printing, and communicating.
000C Machine is scanning and communicating.
000D Machine is operating, scanning and communicating.
000E Machine is printing, scanning and communicating.
000F Machine is operating, printing, scanning and communicating.
For example
When the display shows 1020(008A), the update did not start because the memory is in use, and the ma-
chine was printing and communicating.
3.41.4 The indication while updating

While the software is being updated, you can be checked the status through LED lamps on the panel.
Updating Status
Lighting LED Status
1 <Login> Initializing step
2 <Personal> ROM data acquisition step
3 <Job Confirm.> Updating step
Updating ROM type

Lighting LED ROM type
4 <Copy> Main ROM
5 <Scan> Network
6 <Fax> PCL
Result
Lighting LED ROM type
7 Information lamp Green : Update has succeeded
Red : Update failed
3-151

3.42 Network service functions
The following topics will be covered in this section:
• Starting the service functions
• Downloading image data
• Internet FAX detailed status
• Dial option conversion settings
• Firmware Update via network
• Firmware Update
• Print Data Capture
• Network Capture
• Modifying the session control time
• Input Asset Number
• Storage replacement operation
To open the network service screen,

1. Start the web browser on computer.
2. Type the machine’s IP address in the URL address field followed by “/service”.
e.g. http://192.168.1.10/service
3. Enter login ID and password.

ID : muratec
Password : service
4. Now the network service settings are available.
3-152

3.42.1 Downloading image data
You can download the image data stored on the network board using this function. The data is downloaded
in .zip format.
1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-152.)

2. Click [Retrieve Documents].
3. The folders will be displayed. Click the folder which contains your desired image data.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen and download the image data.
3-153

3.42.2 Internet FAX detailed status
2. Click [IFAX Setailed status].
Items Instructions
Tx Minimum Wait Set the transmission interval for internet fax with location speci-
fied by IP address.
Retry Setting # of Retry : Set the number of times to retry sending the internet
fax when a memory overflow occurred or a socket
error occurred.
Retry interval :Set the retry interval sending the internet fax when
a memory overflow occurred or a socket error oc-
curred.
Insert “X-CIAJWNETFAX” To add a X-CIAJWNETFAX header always, set this function to
header “On”.
This header is usually added only to IFAX that default body and
message are edited, so that the other machine will not print the
message.
When this function is “On”, the body and message will not be
printed on the partner's IFAX machine even if the user has edited
them. (Other companies IFAX may print them.)
X-Mailer To add X-Mailer information (mailer name), enter it here.
MDN Expired Time Set the time which after that the MDN will be printed respectively.
The available time is from 0 to 72 hours. When MDN is demand-
ed in IFAX transmission for several addresses, MDN, which will
be received within this set up time, will be printed together in one
list.
If the time is set up to 0, MDN will be printed every time when it
is received.
Tx E-Mail MIME char setting Select which code to use when transmitting characters other than
ASCII code.
Select “LATIN9 (ISO-8859-15)” only when the user wants to use
this code.
When only ASCII code is used, the message is transmitted with
US-ASCII regardless of this setup.
See the codes on the next page.
Possible reception size Specify the maximum data size for Scan-to-xx. The available
range is from 20-40 MB. Only even numbers are available.
The total size is shared with Internet fax: that means when large
size is specified for Scan-to-xx, internet fax has small size avail-
able. This memory is separated from the machine image memory
and is on the network board.
3-154

3-155

3-156

3.42.3 Convert dialling characters in e-mail gateway functions
The following dialling characters will be converted to certain characters specified here:
Pause (/P)
Tone (/T)
Flash (/F)
For example, when you enter “&A” for “/P” (pause) and specify a fax number like “123/P456”, the number will
be converted to “123&A456” and transmitted at e-mail gateway transmission.

2. Click [Dial Option Conversion].
3. Enter the characters to which the machine should convert the dialling character.
4. Click [Save].
NOTE
• The Flash character (/F) is not available for USA.
• Up to two characters are able to enter for each dialling character.
• For available characters, see table below.
• If the box is blank, the dialling characters will be overridden when transmitting over the e-mail gateway.
3-157

3.42.4 Firmware Update Via Network
To update the machine via network, set the items.
2. Click [Firmware Update via Network Server].
3. Enter the necessary information.
4. Click [Update] to start update.
5. When updating is finished, the machine reboots from itself.

6. Check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded. The ROM version is displayed at “Machine
Status” on the OfficeBridge.
3.42.5 Firmware Update
NOTE
This updating procedure required enough free space on CF memory card. If there is no free space on CF
memory card, this way of update is unavailable.

2. Click [Firmware Update].
3. Click [Browse] to browse the location where the firmware file is located.
eg.
Machine: 2570_USA_A0A0A0_update.bin
Network: OB750_A0A0A0.zip
PCL: OP700_EN_A0A0A0.bin
4. Click [Update].
5. When updating is finished, the machine reboots from itself.
6.Check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded. The ROM version is displayed at “Machine
Status” on the OfficeBridge.
3-158

3.42.6 Print data capture
User can capture and store the PCL Print Commands as a “.PRN File” in CF card on Network Board. This
feature supports concurrent processing to print PCL print data and capture PCL commands.
This feature works with PCL Network Print via LPR, Port 9100 and IPP.

2. Click [Print Data Capture].
3. Enter the necessary information.
4. Click [Capture Start] to start capturing the data.

5. Click [Capture Stop] to stop capturing.
Capturing also stops when the window is closed or the machine is turned off.
6. Click “HTTP Download”, follow the instruction displayed, and download the captured file.
7. Click [File Delete] to delete the file from the CF card.
3.42.7 Network capture

For details of this future, refer to “3.32 Network capture (Packet capture)”.

2. Click [Network Capture].
3. Enter the necessary information. Refer to “3.32.3 Setting details” if needed.
4. Click [Capture Start] to start capturing the data.

5. Click [File Tx] to send the captured the data to the specified location.
3-159

3.42.8 Modifying the session control time
Modify the session time between the machine and the OfficeBridge users here. The factory default is 30 min-
utes.
When there is no communication between the machine and the OfficeBridge user during this time, the user
will forcibly be log out.
The time can be set between 10 to 1440 minutes (24 hours).

2. Click [Session Control time].
3. Input the desired value and click [Save].
3.42.9 Asset Number

This mode is used to input the asset number. You can also input the asset number from the machine control
panel. (See page 3-143.)

2. Click [Machine Settings].
3. Input the asset number and click [Save].
3-160

3.43 Quick TWAIN Settings
3.43.1 About Quick TWAIN
Quick TWAIN enables you to scan documents to a PC application with easy operation that has eliminated the
steps to save the scanned data into a TWAIN box. It has achieved an operational feeling like using the real
times scan by deleting the scanned data automatically from the machine. It does not require PC applications
to open the TWAIN driver screen. This operation can be set on the PC application.
When you enable this setting, ready screen for scanner will be switched to the following:
3.43.2 Customizing Quick TWAIN

Edit the following file to customize your Quick TWAIN:
\Windows\TWAIN_32\251f\mkuetwu.msf  configuration file for USB cable connection
\Windows\TWAIN_32\251f\mkuetwn.msf  configuration file for network connection
The following three points are customizable:

1. Whether to show TWAIN driver UI or not
2. Whether to disable TWAIN application operation
3. Import image on application resolution
4. Specify the resolution of the image to import
1) Whether to show TWAIN driver UI or not

This switch specify the UI screen on your computer.
Quick= 0: OFF / Always show TWAIN driver UI.
1: ON / Shows TWAIN driver UI according to the UI setting of the application side. (Default)
2) Whether to disable TWAIN application operation

This switch disables TWAIN driver UI regardless of the UI setting of the application side.
Auto= 0: OFF / Shows TWAIN driver UI according to “Quick : Whether to show TWAIN driver UI or not.”
(Default)
1: ON / Never shows TWAIN driver UI.
3) Import image on application resolution

This switch enables the application to control the scanning resolution. When you set this switch to “1”, the
image will be converted and imported at a resolution specified by the application software.
AppRes= 0: OFF (Default), 1: ON / Convert
4) Specify the resolution of the image to import

This is the resolution setting for the scanned document. When you set this switch to “1”, the image will be
imported at the resolution specified in advance.
This setting has a higher priority to setting “AppRes : 3) Import image on application resolution”.
FixRes = 0: Resolution depends on the request from the application. (Default)
1: Specify resolution (200/300/400/600 dpi) regardless of the resolution of scanned document.
3-161

4 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting flow chart
Check the detail of the trou-

ble.
Is the user operating the ma- No Does the problem still occurs
chine correctly? with correct operation?
Yes
Is the problem solved by

"Initial checks" operation?
 See page 4-2.
Solve the problem accord-

ing to the following menu.
Checkout error C o m m u n i c a - Image failure D o c u m e n t Recording jam Machine mal-

tion error trouble trouble function
See page : See page : See page : See page : See page : See page :
4-3 4-7 4-25 4-43 4-46 4-47
4-1

4.2 Initial checks
Check all items:
Check items Remedy
Machine Is the power on? Turn the power on.
Are the covers closed correctly? Close all covers correctly.
Is the recording paper set? Set the recording paper.
Are the toner and drum set correctly? Set the toner and drum correctly.
Toner Is the recommended toner used? Advice customers to use recommend-
ed toner otherwise image failure may
occur easily.
Paper Do customers use paper conform to the spec- Advice customers to use suitable
ification designed for use in the machine? paper otherwise image failure or paper
jam may occur easily.
Does folded or wrinkled paper set in the pa- Reload new paper.
per cassette?
Is the paper set correctly? Refer the user's guide to set the paper
correctly. If paper size dial adjustment
or other operation such as paper size
registration is needed, follow the in-
struction.
Paper path Are the inner parts such as fuser, transfer Clean the parts with paper cleaner or
roller, or transfer guide dirty with paper waste etc.
or toner?
Are all cassette parts working smoothly? Replace the part not working smoothly.
Are foreign objects on the paper path? Remove the objects.
Are the feed rollers worn out? Replace the roller.
Scanning area / Do customers use document conform to the Instruct customers to scan document
Document specification designed for use in the ma- on document glass when the document
chine? is not suitable for ADF. Using unsuit-
able document on ADF may cause
document skew, separation problem or
document jam easily.
Are foreign objects on scanning path? Remove the object.
Is the scanner dirty? Clean the scanner as dirty scanner
may cause image failure.
Are the separator roller and separator pad Replace the roller or the pad
worn out?
Communication Is the machine connected to a line jack with a Reconnect it.
line cable?
Are there advanced fax functions such as In some functions, free communication
closed transmission or block junk fax set? is not possible.
Printer environment Is the machine connected to a network hub (or Reconnect it.
printer) with LAN cable (or USB cable)?
Is the print driver or TWAIN driver installed Reinstall the driver following the user's
correctly? guide.
If the machine is on network, is the network Refer to the user's guide and set up
setting correct? the network setting.
Others When the machine is turned on in a warm Wipe the parts with dry soft cloths, or
place while the machine is cool (in winter, es- wait for ten to twenty minutes after
pecially at machine installation), condensation power on.
occurs inside the printer that causes various Instruct customers to open toner or
problem. drum bag after it becomes to room
Trouble examples: temperature.
• Low image density or uneven density due to
recording part condensation.
• Image trouble due to toner moisture absorp-
tion
• Blur image due to condensation on drum
surface.
• Paper discharge problem due to condensa-
tion in paper supply path.
4-2

4.3 Checkout error
4.3.1 Checking the error message
When“ Checkout error” message is displayed, follow the steps below to check the service call number.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.

2. Press [Service Call].
3. Check the service error code on the display.
4-3

4.3.2 Error code
Code Error Message

08: RX Motor Error
0B: Fan Error
18: Fuser Error
1E: Drum Cartridge Fuse Error
47: Developer Cartridge Fuse Error
50: Shift Sensor Error
08: RX Motor Error

Causes:
The machine checks the motor error signal in one second the motor starts driving. When the error sig-
nal is detected for continuous 300ms, this message will be displayed.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Check the connection between RX motor and main control board.
2. Verify the RX motor rotates when the power is on. If OK, see step 5.
3. Check that power is supplied to the Rx motor. If it does not, see step 5.
4. Replace the RX motor if it doesn’t rotate.
5. If the problem is not solved, replace the main control board.
0B: Fan Error

Causes:
The machine checks the fan error signal for three seconds in one second after the motor starts driv-
ing. When the error signal is detected for continuous 400ms, this message will be displayed.
1. Verify the inside fan rotates when the power is on.
2. Check the connection between the fan and Connect A PCB(P87), Connect A PCB (P80C) and the
main board.
3. Replace the fan motor if it doesn’t rotate.
4. Replace the Connect A PCB.
5. Replace the main control board.
18: Fuser Error

Causes:
(The number indicates the detailed error code)
0 The fuser did not become to the main motor driving temperature in 50 seconds after printing started.
1 The fuser did not become to the paper pick-up temperature in 50 seconds after printing started.
2 The fuser did not become to the main motor driving temperature in 30 seconds after warming up
started.
3 The fuser did not become to the warm-up finishing temperature in 30 seconds after the motor start-
ed driving.
4 A temperature of 250°C or higher is detected in a mode other than sleep mode.
5 The fuser does not warm after fuser error is solved and the power is turned OFF/ON.
6 A low temperature of 10°C is detected in 10 seconds after printing started.
7 A temperature of 190°C is detected in ready mode after printing finished.
1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up. If it does not, see step 4.
2. Check the contact between Fusing thermistor and Connect A PCB(P89).
3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board.
4. Replace the Fuser.
5. After replacing the Fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is on.
6. Replace the main control PCB.
4-4

1E: Drum Cartridge Fuse Error
Causes:
The machine could not blow the fuse.
1. Verify the drum cartridge is set correctly.
2. Check the point of contacts between drum cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86).
4. Replace the drum cartridge.
47: Developer Cartridge Fuse Error

Causes:
The machine could not blow the fuse.
1. Verify the toner cartridge is set correctly.
2. Check the point of contacts between toner cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86).
4. Replace the toner cartridge.
50: Shift Sensor Error

Causes:
(The number indicates the detailed error code).
0 The shift sensor does not switch on at warm-up or after 40ms has passed since the shifter has
returned to its position.
1 The shift sensor does not switch off after 40ms has passed since the shifter has moved to its shift
position.
1. Verify that the sensor is working.
2. Check the connection between the sensor and the main LPH board.
4-5

4.3.3 Network system errors
In case “OB sytem error” occurs, refer to the table below to address them.
Error
Trouble Trouble detail Detection timing Countermeasure
code
300 Eternal reboot is The firmware detected an incorrect The machine 1. Update the
detected. status, and machine rebooted to reboots while ROM using the
recover them automatically. When rebooting at the USB memory
this status is detected twice, this error same timing. automatically.
occurs. 2. Replace the storage
You may better the auto-recover (HDD/CF card).
process by updating the firmware. The
detail will be printed on the service
report with developer's code.
400 System data This error occurs with firmware or When the machine
1. Update the
clearing error hardware defect. is powered on. ROM using the
This error occurs when the machine USB memory
reboots from “User data clear” or “All automatically.
RAM clear”, and an incorrect status is 2. Replace the storage
detected. (HDD/CF card).
3. Replace the network
board.
5XX Version This error occurs when an optional When the machine 1. Update the
mismatching CF memory card is attached to the is powered on. ROM using the
error network board, and the firmware USB memory
version on the CF memory card and automatically.
network board do not match. 2. Replace the storage
(HDD/CF card).
1XXYY* System error This error occurs with firmware or When the machine 1. Update the
hardware defect. is powered on. ROM using the
Firmware defect will be recovered by USB memory
updating it, but hardware defect needs automatically.
its replacement. 2. Replace the network
board.
3. Replace the main
control board.
2XXYY* Setting data Occurs mainly when the data stored When the machine 1. Update the
initialize error on the CF memory card is corrupted. is powered on ROM using the
You may recover it by updating the USB memory
firmware, if that does not work, clear automatically.
the data. 2. Perform “All RAM
Clear”.
3. Replace the storage
(HDD/CF card).
4. Replace the network
board.
* : XX and YY are function returned values.
4-6

4.4 Communication tourble
4.4.1 Fax communication error
The error code are printed on T.30 monitor.

Detail
Phase Error code Description Journal Redial Message Note
Error code
Tx Phase A D.0.1 0001 Local busy detection. No Yes The sending was stopped. Please try again.
D.0.2 0002 Busy Tone detected The line was busy. Please try again.
D.0.3 0003 Canceled transmission while dialing No Fax job was cancelled by user. Occurs at broadcast with TCR.
D.0.7 0007 Receiver does not answer Yes Check condition of remote fax.
D.0.8 0008 Can not detect dial tone No dial tone detection. Check line connection.
Tx Phase B T.1.1 1011 T1 time-out error Yes Only Confirm the remote fax.
when one
or more
pages are
received
T.2.1 1021 Can not detect CFR or FTT No Confirm the remote fax.
T.2.2 1022 Compatibility error Confirm the remote fax.
1100 Password transmission failed ID check Tx error. ID was not matched.
1101 Cannot obtain password at password ID check Tx error. No fax number stored in remote fax.
transmission from receiving party
1102 The obtained password from receiver at
password transmission is blank
1103 The receiver is a product of other maker Close Tx error. Remote fax is not compatible.
at closed communication
1104 The receiver has no pass code field at Close Tx error. No pass -code stored in remote fax.
closed transmission
1105 The pass code did not match at closed Close Tx error. Passcode unmatched.
transmission
1106 No document stored for polling Polling Tx error. No document for polling is stored in This error occurs at manual
memory. reception.
1107 The pass code did not match at pass Close Tx error. Passcode unmatched.
code polling
1108 The receiver is a product of other maker Close polling Tx error. Remote fax is not compatible.
at pass code polling
1109 Cannot adjust communication data rate Confirm the remote fax. Normally, this error does not
110A Cannot adjust the communication mode occur.
(Normal, fine, super fine)
110B Cannot receive standard frame Confirm the remote fax.
110C DIS T4 bit did not turn ON Confirm the remote fax. Normally, this error does not
110D DIS or DTC that FIF is 00 00 00 has occur.
been received. DTS requires hang up.
German models only.
4-7

Detail
Error code
Tx Phase B T.2.2 110E The receiver has no box with matching Yes No F-Code Tx Error. No F-Code information in the remote
sub-address machine.
110F The receiver has no box that matches F-Code Tx Error. The Box does not exist in the remote
with the sender machine.
1110 No document stored at polling in the F-Code Tx Error. No document for polling is stored in F- This error occurs at manual
designated box Code box. reception.
1111 The receiver tried to poll document in a Check condition of remote fax.
security box
1112 Polling rejected while receiving docu- F-Code Polling error. Cannot access the F-Code box.
ment on another line at multi line recep-
tion
1113 Polling rejected while storing or clearing
documents
1114 Polling rejected while printing docu-
ments
1115 Cannot fast remote diagnose No High-speed RDS. Cannot send a data. This error occurs at manual
reception.
1116 Trouble report was sent, but the receiver Cannot send a trouble report. Remote machine is not RDS
was not a diagnose host host.
T.2.3 1023 FTT returned at 2400 bps Cannot receive with minimum speed.
Tx Phase C T.3.1 1031 Document feeding error Yes No Scanning error. Please send again.
Document length was over 1m
Lamp error
Scanner cover open error
Tx Phase D T.4.1 1041 Cannot receive MCF/RTN/RTP/PIP/PIN Yes Only at Confirm the remote fax.
memory Tx
T.4.2 1042 RTN was received No The remote machine could not receive document.
T.5.1 1051 No response to RR No Confirm the remote fax.
T.5.2 1052 No response to CTC No
T.5.3 1053 EOR output Cannot receive with minimum speed.
Tx V34 start up T.8.1 1081 V8 process did not finished normally Yes No Cannot send a fax in SuperG3 mode.
1800 Primary channel instruction did not
match at V8 mode
match at V8 mode (TX FAX)
match at V8 mode (RX FAX)
1803 Cannot adjust modulation
T.8.10 108A Cannot finish line probing normally No Yes
T.8.11 108B Cannot finish equalizer training normally
Transmission T.1.4 1014 Operator canceled the transmission Yes No Fax job was cancelled by user.
canceled
4-8

Detail
Error code
Rx Phase B R.1.1 2011 T1 time-out error No, if no No Confirm the remote fax. Occurs at manual reception.
page is
received at
auto recep-
tion
R.1.2 2012 Compatibility error Yes No Confirm the remote fax.
2100 The receiver is a product of other maker Closed Tx Err. Remote fax is not compatible.
at closed communication
2101 No pass code received at closed com- Close Rx error. No passcode stored in remote fax.
munication
2102 The receiver has no pass code field at Close Rx error. Passcode unmatched.
closed communication
2103 Reception blocked because of junk fax Reject.
blocking function
2104 Cannot receive sender's ID at junk fax Reception was rejected by the block junk fax function.
blocking function
2105 Sender's ID is blank at junk fax blocking
function
2106 Sender has no polling document stored Polling Rx error. No document for polling is stored in re-
mote fax.
2107 Cannot adjust communication data rate Confirm the remote fax. Normally, this error does not
2108 Cannot adjust communication code (MH, occur.
MR, MMR)
2109 Cannot adjust communication code
(Normal, fine, super fine)
210A Cannot adjust ECM mode
210B Cannot adjust document width
210C Cannot adjust minimum communication
time
210D Cannot adjust document length
210E Cannot receive standard frame Confirm the remote fax.
210F Out-of -paper reception buffer error Out of paper reception is full.
2110 Cannot receive error report at F-code The F-Code RelayReception cannot be performed if fax
relay reception because wrong TSI number is not stored.
2111 Cannot receive document because F-Code Polling error. Remote machine does not have F-
sender has not polling ability Code polling function.
2112 Cannot receive F-code document be- Confirm the remote fax.
cause of wrong sub address
2113 The receiver has no box that matches F-Code Tx Err. The box does not exist in the machine.
with the sender
2114 Document was sent to a reception pro- F-Code Rx Err. The F-Code is set as the ban on reception.
tected box
2115 Reception rejected while receiving F-Code Rx Err. Cannot access the F-Code box.
document to that box on another line at
multi line reception
4-9

Detail
Error code
Rx Phase B R.1.2 2116 The F-code box stores document to its Yes No F-Code Rx Err. The F-Code box is full.
maximum capacity
2117 Reception rejected while storing or F-Code Rx Err. Cannot access the F-Code box
clearing documents
2118 Reception rejected while printing docu-
ments
2119 Cannot delete document for overwrite at Machine error. Normally, this error does not
overwrite mode occur.
211A Cannot update Flash ROM through com- Reception was stopped.
munication
211B Cannot fast remote diagnose No High-speed RDS. Cannot receive data.
R.2.3 2023 No answer to FTT Confirm the remote fax.
Rx Phase C R.3.1 2031 No answer to CFR Yes No Confirm the remote fax.
DCN received
R.3.3 2033 Hang up Reception was stopped.
Continuous error line detected
R.3.4 2034 DCN received to TT Cannot receive with minimum speed.
R.3.6 2036 FRTN output Some pages are not received correctly.
R.4.4 2044 Memory overflow Memory over.
R.4.1 2041 Too long document received Received doc. is not able to receive. Document over 3m
Rx Phase D R.4.2 2042 Cannot receive MPS/EOM/EOP Yes No Confirm the remote fax.
R.5.1 2051 Cannot receive RR
DNC received
R.5.2 2052 Error occurred while ECM data mode
Rx V34 start up R.8.1 2081 V8 process did not finished normally Yes No Cannot send a fax in SuperG3 mode.
match at V8 mode
match at V8 mode (TX FAX)
match at V8 mode (RX FAX)
2803 Cannot adjust modulation
R.8.10 208A Cannot finish line probing normally No Yes at poll-

ing recep-
tion
R.8.11 208B Cannot finish equalizer training normally Yes at poll-
ing recep-
tion
4-10

4.4.2 Network communication error
Scan to E-mail / Internet FAX transmission results

Error code Display Message Description Countermeasure
1000 Transmission OK Transmission completed. —
complete
995 Transmission Not able to transmit. DNS server name resolution failed. Check the DNS setting.
error Mail server is not found.
988 Not able to transmit. Authentication method in SMTP is dif- Check the SMTP/POP setting is correct.
Please confirm setting. ferent.
987 User authentication failed.
990 MAIL command in SMTP failed.
997 Main setting is not correct.
989 Not able to transmit. RCPT command in SMTP failed. Check the e-mail address set as destination is correct.
Please confirm e-mail address.
993 Not able to transmit. Socket error. Try transmission again.
992 Please transmit a message once Response time out error. Check the network connections.
991 again. SMTP command failed.
999 Memory error.
996 Transmission job parameter error.
986 File generating error.
984 Code converter error.
985 File not existing.
980 Unknown error.
994 Not a reply from e-mail server. Connection error.
1002 Transmission Not able to transmit. Stop error. —
canceled Stopped.
4-11

Internet FAX reception result
Error code Descrpition Countermeasure
1 — —
2 The MFP is not compatible with the Ask the sender to send an internet fax in a compatible file format.
e-mail attached image.
3 The MFP refused to forward the re- •To respond to the forward request, set “Response to Fax Forwarding Request” in E-mail Settings > Optional
ceived e-mail. E-mail Settings.
•Check “E-mail address or domain name that will accept forwarded transmission” at “Response to Fax Forward-
ing Request” in E-mail Settings > Optional E-mail Settings.
4 Cannot access to POP3 server. Check that POP3 Server Address, POP3 Port Number, SSL, and POP3S Port Number is set correctly in E-mail
Settings > SMTP/POP Settings.
5 No response from POP3 server. Check the DNS server address in TCP/IP setting.
Check the following items are set correct in E-mail Settings > SMTP/POP Settings: POP3 server address, POP
3 port number, SSL usage, and POP 3 S port number.
6 POP3 server authentication failed. Check the following items are set correct in E-mail Settings > SMTP/POP Settings: Authentication method,
POP3 user name, and POP 3 user password.
Result of the reception error

Code Display and history Check message Description
1 (No message) — The mail was received, and processed successfully.
2 Fax forwarding FAX forwarded.
3 Print Printed (MDN or DSN).
4 Error E-mail (MDN) An error occurred, and replied to the MDN.
5 Error E-mail (Forwarding) An error occurred, and e-mail is forwarded.
6 Error E-mail (Reply) An error occurred, and an e-mail is replied
7 Error E-mail (Notice) An error occurred, and an notification is sent.
8 Error E-mail (Size over) An error occurred, and oversize notification is sent.
9 Erase The e-mail was deleted.
4-12

Scan to folder, Scan to Printer transmission result
Internal er-
Error Code Description Check message Detail Countermeasure Description
ror
10000 Transmission completed OK － Success Success
successfully
9999 System error System error occurred. Error occurred of tempo- Wait for a while, and try to SMB error
9000 rary system shortage. send again. Internal er-
ror
9994 Domain was not found. • Domain was not found. • This error occurres when Check that host name on the This error does not occur at
(This error does not ap- a same host name is on network. scan to folder.
9993 Computer was not found pear on check message the network. Check that host name on the It occurs at browsing a file
and communication his- • This error occurres when network. using touch panel or WEB
tory) a same work group name browser.
• Computer was not found. is on the network.
(This error does not ap-
pear on check message
and communication his-
tory)
9989 Size of a file to acquire Size of a file to acquire The attached file size ex- Check the file size of the at-
exceeded size at the exceeded size at the maxi- ceeds the limitation. tached file.
maximum. mum.
3 Connection error Not able to be connect. • This error occurs when a • Check that host name on Parameter Invalid parameter
same work group name the network. error
18 is on the network. • Check DNS server ad- Error Data retrieval error
• Name resolution failed dress, DNS suffix, and retrieving
WINS server address are data
19 set correct at "TCP/IP set- Invalid Invalid open mode
tings". open mode
20 • Check that the destination Server Server does not support
computer name is regis- doesn't MAC signing
tered on DNS server. support
• Check that the destination MAC sign-
computer registers WINS ing
setting correctly.
21 MAC sig- MAC signature in incoming
nature in packet was broken
incoming
packet was
broken
4-13

Internal er-
ror
22 Connection error Not able to be connect. • This error occurs when a • Check that host name on database Database object already ex-
same work group name the network. object al- ists and cannot be created
is on the network. • Check DNS server ad- ready exists
• Name resolution failed dress, DNS suffix, and and cannot
WINS server address are be created
23 set correct at "TCP/IP set- mount failed CIFS Client mount failed to
tings". for a reason connect to remote server
• Check that the destination other then
computer name is regis- authentication
24 tered on DNS server. unable to dis- unable to dispose resources
• Check that the destination pose resourc-
computer registers WINS es
25 setting correctly. invalid handle invalid handle passed
passed
26 SPNEGO SPNEGO negotiation did not
negotiation find a match
did not find a
match
27 path should be path should be resolved over
resolved over DFS
DFS
28 DFS cache DFS cache overflow
overflow
1001 SMB_ Invalid function. The server
ERRbadfuncdid not recognize or could
not perform a system call
generated by the server, e.g.
set the DIRECTORY attri-
bute on a data file, invalid
seek mode.
1007 SMB_ Memory control blocks de-
ERRbadmcb stroyed
1008 SMB_ Insufficient server memory to
ERRnomem perform the requested func-
tion
1009 SMB_ Invalid memory block ad-
ERRbadmem dress
4-14

Internal er-
ror
1010 Connection error Not able to be connect. • This error occurs when a • Check that host name on SMB_ Invalid environment
same work group name the network. ERRbadenv
1011 is on the network. • Check DNS server ad- SMB_ Invalid format
• Name resolution failed dress, DNS suffix, and RRbadformat
1003 WINS server address are SMB_ Directory invalid. A directory
set correct at "TCP/IP set- ERRbadpath component in a pathname
tings". could not be found.
1013 • Check that the destination SMB_ Invalid data (generated only
computer name is regis- ERRbaddata by IOCTL calls within the
tered on DNS server. server)
1015 • Check that the destination SMB_ Invalid drive specified
computer registers WINS ERRbaddrive
1016 setting correctly. SMB_ A Delete Directory request
ERRremcd attempted remove the serv-
er's current directory
1017 SMB_ Not the same device (e.g. a
ERRdiffdevice cross volume rename was
attempted)
1032 SMB_ The sharing mode specified
ERRbadshare for Open conflicts with exist-
ing FIDs on the file.
1033 SMB_ERRlock A Lock request conflicted
with an existing lock or speci-
fied an invalid mode, or an
Unlock requested attempted
to remove a lock held by
another process.
1066 SMB_ The specified device type
ERRdontsup- conflicts with the actual
portipc device type on the remote
resource.
1080 SMB_ The file named in the request
ERRfilexists already exists.
1087 SMB_ Invalid directory name in a
ERRbaddirec- path.
tory
4-15

Internal er-
ror
1122 Connection error Not able to be connect. • This error occurs when a • Check that host name on SMB_ "The buffer is too small to
same work group name the network. ERRinsuffi- contain the entry.
is on the network. • Check DNS server ad- cientbuffer No information has been
• Name resolution failed dress, DNS suffix, and written to the buffer."
1123 WINS server address are SMB_ Invalid name.
set correct at "TCP/IP set- ERRinvalid-
tings". name
1183 • Check that the destination SMB_ Object already exists. Re-
computer name is regis- ERRal- turned on attempt to create
tered on DNS server. readyexists file or directory which already
• Check that the destination exists on the server.
1230 computer registers WINS SMB_ Pipe invalid
setting correctly. ERRbadpipe
1231 SMB_ All instances of the request-
ERRpipebusy ed pipe are busy.
1232 SMB_ Pipe close in progress.
ERRpipeclos-
ing
1233 SMB_ No process on other end of
ERRnotcon- pipe.
nected
1234 SMB_ There is more date to be
ERRmoredata returned.
2001 SMB_ Non-specific error code,
ERRerror returned under the following
conditions: resource other
than disk space exhausted
(e.g. TIDs), first SMB com-
mand was not negotiate,
multiple negotiates attempted,
and internal server error.
4-16

Internal er-
ror
1002 File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination SMB_ File not found. The last com-
ing and writing. the destination shared shared folder is not read/ ERRbadfile ponent of file's pathname
folder is read/write pro- write protected. could not be found.
1004 tected. SMB_ Too many open files. The
ERRnofids server has file handles avail-
able.
1006 SMB_ Invalid file handle. The file
ERRbadfid handle specified was not
recognized by the server.
2250 SMB_ Temporarily unable to sup-
ERRusempx port Raw, use MPX mode
2251 SMB_ Temporarily unable to sup-
ERRusestd port Raw, use standard read/
write
2252 SMB_ Continue in MPX mode
ERRcontmpx
2999 SMB_ Function not supported
ERRnosupport
3019 SMB_ Attempt to write on write-
ERRnowrite protected media
3020 SMB_ Unknown unit
ERRbadunit
3021 SMB_ Drive not ready
ERRnotready
3022 SMB_ Unknown command
ERRbadcmd
3023 SMB_ Data error (CRC)
ERRdata
3024 SMB_ Bad request structure length
ERRbadreq
3025 SMB_ Seek error
ERRseek
3026 SMB_ Unknown media type
ERRbadmedia
4-17

Internal er-
ror
3027 File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination SMB_ Sector not found
ing and writing. the destination shared shared folder is not read/ ERRbadsector
3028 folder is read/write pro- write protected. SMB_ Printer out of paper
tected. ERRnopaper
3029 SMB_ Write fault
ERRwrite
3030 SMB_ Read fault
ERRread
3031 SMB_ General failure
ERRgeneral
3034 SMB_ The wrong disk was found in
ERRwrongdisk a drive
3035 SMB_ No FCBs are available to
ERRFCBU- process request
navail
3036 SMB_ A sharing buffer has been
ERRshare- exceeded
bufexc
3039 SMB_ The disk is full
ERRdiskfull
4000 Error request-
Error requesting file attri-
ing file size
butes
1005 Login error Not able to log in. Cannot login with the • Check that the entered SMB_ Access denied, the client's
entered user name and user name and password ERRnoacces context does not permit the
password. are correct. requested function. This
• Check that the entered user includes the following condi-
name and password have tions: invalid rename com-
authority to write. mand, write to Fid open for
read only, read on Fid open
for write only, attempt to de-
lete a non-empty directory.
1012 SMB_ Invalid open mode
ERRbadac-
cess
4-18

Internal er-
ror
2002 Login error Not able to log in. Cannot login with the • Check that the entered SMB_ Invalid password - name/
entered user name and user name and password ERRbadpw password pair in a Tree
password. are correct. Connect or Session Setup is
• Check that the entered user invalid.
2004 name and password have SMB_ The client does not have
authority to write. ERRaccess the necessary access rights
within the specified context
for the requested function.
2005 SMB_ The TID specified in a com-
ERRinvtid mand was invalid.
2006 SMB_ Invalid network name in tree
ERRinvnet- connect
name
2007 SMB_ Invalid device - printer re-
ERRinvde- quest made to non-printer
vice connection or non-printer
request made to printer con-
nection.
2049 SMB_ Print queue full (files) -- re-
ERRqfull turned by open print file
2050 SMB_ Print queue full -- no space
ERRqtoobig
2051 SMB_ EOF on print queue dump
ERRqeof
2052 SMB_ Invalid print file FID
ERRinvfid
2064 SMB_ The server did not recognize
ERRsmbcmd the command received.
2065 SMB_ The server encountered an
ERRsrverror internal error, e.g. system file
unavailable.
2067 SMB_ The FID and pathname pa-
ERRfile- rameters contained an invalid
combination of values.
specs
2069 SMB_ The access permissions
ERRbadper- specified for a file or directory
are not a valid combination.
mits The server cannot set the
requested attribute.
4-19

Internal er-
ror
2071 Login error Not able to log in. Cannot login with the • Check that the entered SMB_ The attribute mode in the
entered user name and user name and password ERRsetat- Set File Attribute request is
password. are correct. trmode invalid.
2081 • Check that the entered user SMB_ Server paused (reserved for
name and password have ERRpaused messaging)
2082 authority to write. SMB_ Not receiving messages
ERRmsgoff (reserved for messaging)
2083 SMB_ No room to buffer message
ERRnoroom (reserved for messaging)
2087 SMB_ Too many remote user
ERRrmuns names (reserved for mes-
saging)
2088 SMB_ Operation timed out

ERRtimeout
2089 SMB_ No resources currently avail-
ERRnor- able for request
esource
2090 SMB_ERR Too many UIDs active on
toomany-uids this session
2091 SMB_ The UID is not known as a
ERRinvuid valid user identifier on this
session.
1018 Cannot finde the file in Not a file to a shared Cannot find the specified Check that the file is in the SMB_ A File Search command can
the shared folder folder. file in the specified folder. folder. ERRnofiles find no more files matching
the specified criteria.
1067 Cannot finde the shared Not a shared folder. Cannot find the specified Check that the folder is set as SMB_ The specified share name
folder folder. a shared folder. ERRnos-hare cannot be found on the re-
mote server.
5000 ScanTag format error XML format error An invalid character is Check the “Metadata Name” — When the “Output File For-
entered in the “Metadata field and reenter it. mat” is set to “XML Type A”,
Name” field. the available characters are
limited.
• A space cannot be entered.
• “*” or a number cannot be
entered as the first charac-
ter.
4-20

Scan to FTP server transmission result
Internal er-
ror
10000 Transmission completed OK Success
successfully
9999 System error System error occurred. An error occurred because Retry later. FTP error
9000 there was a temporary Internal er-
system memory shortage. ror
2 Connection error Not able to be connected Name resolution failed •Check DNS server address CURLE_ Very early initialization code
is set correct at "TCP/IP set- FAILED_INIT
failed. This is likely to be an
tings". internal error or problem. ->
•Check that the destination unsupported parameter to
FTP server name is regis- CURLOPT_FTPSSLAUTH
3 tered on DNS server. CURLE_ The URL was not properly
URL_ formatted. ->No filename
MALFORMAT specified for FTP upload/bad
FTP String
5 CURLE_ Couldn't resolve proxy. The
COULDNT_ given proxy host could not
RESOLVE_ be resolved.
PROXY
6 CURLE_ Couldn't resolve host. The
COULDNT_ given remote host was not
RESOLVE_ resolved.
HOST
7 CURLE_ Failed to connect to host or
COULDNT_ proxy.
CONNECT
8 CURLE_ FTP_ After connecting to an FTP
WEIRD_ server, libcurl expects to get
SERVER_ a certain reply back. This
REPLY error code implies that it got
a strange or bad reply. The
given remote server is prob-
ably not an OK FTP server.
9 CURLE_ FTP_ a service was denied by the
ACCESS_ FTP server due to lack of ac-
DENIED cess - when login fails this is
not returned.
4-21

Internal er-
ror
11 Connection error Not able to be connected Name resolution failed •Check DNS server address CURLE_ After having sent the FTP
is set correct at "TCP/IP set- FTP_WEIRD_ password to the server, lib-
tings". PASS_REPLY curl expects a proper reply.
•Check that the destination This error code indicates that
FTP server name is regis- an unexpected code was
tered on DNS server. returned.
13 CURLE_ libcurl failed to get a sensible
FTP_WEIRD_ result back from the server
PASV_REPLY as a response to either a
PASV or a EPSV command.
The server is flawed.
14 CURLE_FTP_ FTP servers return a 227-
WEIRD_227_ line as a response to a PASV
FORMAT command. If libcurl fails to
parse that line, this return
code is passed back.
15 CURLE_FTP_ An internal failure to lookup
CANT_GET_ the host used for the new
HOST connection.
28 CURLE_ The timeout time was
OPERATION_ reached.
TIMEOUTED
30 CURLE_FTP_ FTP PORT operation failed.
PORT_ The FTP PORT command
FAILED returned error. This mostly
happen when you haven't
specified a good enough ad-
dress for libcurl to use.
31 CURLE_FTP_ The REST command failed.
COULDNT_ This should never happen if
USE_REST the server is sane.
36 CURLE_BAD_ Couldn't resume download
DOWNLOAD_
RESUME
42 CURLE_ Aborted by callback. A call-
ABORTED_ back returned "abort" to
BY_ libcurl.
CALLBACK
55 CURLE_ failed sending network data
SEND_
ERROR
4-22

Internal er-
ror
56 Connection error Not able to be connected Name resolution failed •Check DNS server address CURLE_ Failure in receiving network
is set correct at "TCP/IP set- RECV_ER- data
tings". ROR
63 •Check that the destination CURLE_ Maximum file size exceeded
FTP server name is regis- FILESIZE_
tered on DNS server. EXCEEDED
17 File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination CURLE_FTP_ Couldn't set desired mode
ing and writing. the destination FTP server FTP server is not write pro- COULDNT_
is write protected. tected. SET_BINARY
18 CURLE_ A file transfer was shorter or
PARTIAL_ larger than expected. This
FILE happens when the server
first reports an expected
transfer size, and then
delivers data that doesn't
match the previously given
size. (result != 226 Trans-
fer complete, result != 250
Requested file action okay,
completed.)
19 CURLE_FTP_ This was either a weird reply
COULDNT_ to a 'RETR' command or a
RETR_FILE zero byte transfer complete.
21 CURLE_FTP_ When sending custom
QUOTE_ ER- "QUOTE" commands to the
ROR remote server, one of the
commands returned an error
code that was 400 or higher
(for FTP) or otherwise indi-
cated unsuccessful comple-
tion of the command.
23 CURLE_ An error occurred when writ-
WRITE_ ing received data to a local
ERROR file, or an error was returned
to libcurl from a write call-
back.
4-23

Internal er-
ror
25 File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination CURLE_ Failed starting the upload.
ing and writing. the destination FTP server FTP server is not write pro- UPLOAD_ For FTP, the server typically
is write protected. tected. FAILED denied the STOR command.
The error buffer usually con-
tains the server's explanation
to this. (This error code was
formerly known as CURLE_
FTP_COULDNT_STOR_
FILE.)
25 CURLE_FTP_ same as CURLE_UPLOAD_
COULDNT_ FAILED
STOR_FILE
26 CURLE_ Could open/read from file
READ_ ER-
ROR
27 CURLE_OUT_ A memory allocation request
OF_MEMORY failed. This is serious bad-
ness and things are severely
screwed up if this ever occur.
67 Login error Not able to log in. Cannot login with the Check that the entered user CURLE_ User: password or similar
entered user name and name and password are cor- LOGIN_ was not accepted and we
password. rect. DENIED failed to login
4-24

4.5 Image quality problems
Go through the following steps to solve the problem:
1. Check the machine parameters for image quality adjustments and see if the problems solves.
2. Adjust the background level and see if the problem solves. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9> and select
[Background level], and press <Start>.) Clean the document glass and document pad in advance.
3. Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (scanner section) or the output system (printer
section):
1. Make copy full size copy of a document
(Original) (Copy)
2. Make a reduction copy of the document.
(Original) (Copy) - Input system cause : scanner
(Original) (Copy) - Output system cause: printer
4-25

4.5.1 Typical fault images
1. Blank image 2. Black iamge 3. Low image density / rough image
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4. Dark image density 5. Blank lines/ Blank spots 6. Void areas
ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE
7. Black lines 8. Black spots 9. Smear on back
ABCDE ABCDE A
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
10. Gradation reproduction failure 11. Periodically uneven image 12. Uneven image density
4-26

4.5.2 Blank image
Scanner section
Section Step Check items Result Remedy
Scanner section 1 Is the scanner drive transmission NO Check and change as
(Front side) mechanism in good condition? necessary.
2 Do the connection from CCD  NO Reconnect / Replace harness.
Scanner board  Main control board
 LPH board  LPH connect board
 LED unit remain intact?
3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES Clean or replace the parts, and
adjust the background level.
4 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace scanner board.
steps? 2. Replace main control board.
3. Replace LPH board.
4. Replace LPH connect board.
5. Replace LPH.

Scanner section 1 Do the connection from CCD  NO Reconnect / Replace harness.
(Back side) R-Scanner board  RADF board
Main control board  LPH board
 LPH connect board  LED unit
remain intact?
3 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace R-Scanner board.
steps? 2. Replace RADF board.
3. Replace main control board.
6. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Toner cartridge 1 Is the toner cartridge driven properly? NO Correct / Replace drive
coupling mechanism of toner
cartridge and machine.
Replace the toner cartridge.
2 Is the developing bias or supply bias YES Clean. / Replace.
contact terminal dirty or deformed?
Drum cartridge 3 Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact YES Clean. / Replace.
terminal, or drum ground contact
terminal dirty or deformed?
Circuit boards 4 Are the connections from LPH to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
high-voltage board, and from high-
voltage board to main control board
in good condition?
(Check plugs firmly plugged and
snapped harness)
Transfer section 5 Is the transfer bias contact terminal YES Clean. / Replace.
dirty or deformed?
4-27

6 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace toner cartridge.
steps? 2. Replace drum cartridge.
3. Replace LPH.
7. Replace high-voltage power
board.
8. Replace transfer roller unit.
4.5.3 Black image
Scanner section
Section Step Check item Result Remedy
Scanner section 1 Does the LED lamp turn ON when YES Check step 5 and onward.
(Front side) making copy with open platen cover? NO Reconnect / Replace harness.
2 Did 24V output between P2 pin 1 and NO Replace main control board.
4 on Scanner board, when performing
the operation of step 1?
3 Did 24V output between P4 pin 16 NO Replace scanner board.
and 18 on Scanner board, when per-
forming the operation of step 1?
4 Did 24V turn ON and OFF at P3 pin 2 YES Replace LED lamp board.
on CCD board, when performing the
operation of step 1? NO Replace scanner unit.
5 Are the mirrors and lens installed NO Install them properly.
properly?
7 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace main control board.
steps? 2. Replace LPH board.
4. Replace LPH.

Scanner section 1 Does the DADF LED lamp turn ON YES Check step 5 and onward.
(Back side) when making duplex copy? NO Reconnect / Replace harness.
2 Did 24V output between P2 pin 1 and NO Replace main control board.
3 on RADF board, when performing
the operation of step 1?
3 Did 24V output between P1 pin 1 and NO Replace RADF board.
2 and P3 pin 13 and 15 on R-Scanner * Replace the R-Scanner board
board, when performing the operation when there is no 24 V output
of step 1? between P3 pin 13 and 15.
4 Did 24V turn ON and OFF at P3 pin 2 YES Replace LED lamp board.
on CCD board, when performing the
operation of step 1? NO Replace scanner frame assy.
5 Are the mirrors and lens installed NO Install them properly.
properly?
7 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace LPH board.
steps? 2. Replace LPH connect board.
3. Replace LPH.
4-28

Printer section
in good condition?
snapped harness)
3 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace drum cartridge.
steps? 2. Replace LPH.
board.
4.5.4 Low image density / rough image
Scanner section
Scanner section 1 Is the scanner drive transmission NO Check and change as
(Front side) mechanism in good condition? necessary.
2 Are the document glass, back plate YES Clean the parts, and adjust the
and ADF glass dirty? background level.
4 Is the platen cover floating by copying YES Copy with opened platen cover.
a thick volume?
5 Do the connection from CCD  NO Reconnect / Replace harness
5. Replace LPH.
4-29

Scanner section 1 Is the DADF glass dirty? YES Clean the part, and adjust the
(Back side) background level.
R-Scanner board  RADF board
remain intact?
6. Replace LPH.
Printer section
LPH 1 Is the lens dirty? YES Clean.
Toner cartridge 2 Is the developing bias or supply bias YES Clean. / Replace.
dirty or deformed?
5 Is the transfer roller gap dirty? YES Clean. / Replace.
Circuit boards 6 Are the connections from LPH to NO Reconnect. / Replace the
high-voltage board, and from high- harness.
in good condition?
snapped harness)
Toner sensor 7 Is the toner sensor working? NO Reconnect. / Replace sensor.
error (Use “Sensor input test mode” and
check that the sensor is working.)

3. Replace LPH.
board.
4-30

4.5.5 Dark image density
Scanner section
Scanner 1 Are the ADF glass and document YES Clean the parts, and adjust the
(Front side) glass dirty? background level.
2 Is the platen cover floating by copying YES Copy with opened platen cover.
a thick volume?
4 Is the LED lamp dirty or deteriorated? YES Clean. / Replace.
5 Is the connection from LED lamp to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
CCD board in good condition?
6 Is the connection from CCD board to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
scanner board in good condition?
7 Is the connection from scanner NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
board to main control board in good
condition?
8 Is the connection from main control NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
board to high-voltage power board in
good condition?

Scanner 1 Is the DADF glass dirty? YES Clean the part, and adjust the
(Back side) background level.
4 Is the connection from LED lamp to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
CCD board in good condition?
5 Is the connection from CCD board to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
R-Scanner board in good condition?
6 Is the connection from R-Scanner NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
board to RADF board in good
condition?
7 Is the connection from RADF board to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
main control board in good condition?
8 Is the connection from main control NO Reconnect. / Replace harness.
board to high-voltage power board in
good condition?
4-31

Printer section
Toner cartridge 1 Is the developing or bias supply bias YES Clean. / Replace.
Drum cartridge 2 Is the charge wire dirty? YES Clean.
3 Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact YES Clean. / Replace.
in good condition?
snapped harness)
5 Is the trouble settled with above YES 1. Replace toner cartridge.
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4.5.6 Blank lines
Scanner section
Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, ADF glass and YES Clean.
(Front side) document glass dirty? If the trouble is not settled by
cleaning, adjust the background
level.
5. Replace LPH.
4-32

Scanner section 1 Is the DADF glass dirty? YES Clean.
(Back side) If the trouble is not settled by
cleaning, adjust the background
level.
remain intact?
6. Replace LPH.
Printer section
LED unit 1 Is the LED dirty? YES Clean.
Toner cartridge 2 Is the toner layer on the developing NO Replace.
roller normal?
Fusing unit 3 Is the fusing roller or separation YES Clean. / Replace.
scraper dirty or damaged?
Drum cartridge 4 Is the separation sheet dirty or YES Clean. / Replace.
damaged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
Transfer section 6 Is the transfer roller dented or YES Replace.
damaged?
Discharge plate 7 Is the discharge plate deformed? YES Replace.
steps? 2. Replace the fusing unit.
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4-33

4.5.7 Void areas
Scanner section
(Front side) document glass dirty? If the trouble is not settled
by cleaning, adjust the
background level.
5. Replace LPH.

Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, DADF glass YES Clean.
(Back side) and document glass dirty? If the trouble is not settled
background level.
remain intact?
6. Replace LPH.
Printer section
LED unit 1 Is the LED dirty? YES Clean.
Toner cartridge 2 Is the toner layer on the developing NO Replace.
roller normal?
Fusing unit 3 Is the fusing roller dirty or damaged? YES Clean. / Replace.
Drum cartridge 4 Is the drum cartridge dirty or YES Clean. / Replace.
damaged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
4-34

damaged?
8 Is the transfer roller gap dirty? YES Clean. / Replace.
steps? 2. Replace fusing unit.
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4.5.8 Black lines
Scanner section
background level.
5. Replace LPH.

background level.
remain intact?
6. Replace LPH.
4-35

Printer section
Paper path 1 Is paper path dirty with toner? YES Clean.
3 Is the drum dirty or damaged? YES Replace.
Toner cartridge 5 Is the developing roller dirty or YES Replace.
damaged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
3. Replace toner cartridge.
4. Replace LPH.
board.
4.5.9 Black spots
Scanner section
background level.
5. Replace LPH.
4-36

background level.
remain intact?
6. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Drum cartridge 2 Is there any cleaning trouble? YES Replace.
Toner cartridge 5 Is the developing roller dirty or dam- YES Replace.
aged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
3. Replace toner cartridge.
4. Replace LPH.
board.
4-37

4.5.10 Smear on back
Printer section
damaged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
5 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace fusing unit.
steps? 2. Replace high-voltage power
board.
4.5.11 Gradation reproduction failure
Scanner section
Scanner section 1 Is the shading sheet under the YES Clean.
(Front side) contact cover dirty? If the trouble is not settled
background level.
2 Are the document glass, back plate, YES Clean.
and ADF glass dirty? If the trouble is not settled
background level.
5. Replace LPH.
4-38

Scanner section 1 Is the shading plate for DADF YES Clean.
(Back side) scnanning section dirty? If the trouble is not settled
background level.
2 Is the DADF glass dirty? YES Clean.
If the trouble is not settled
background level.
remain intact?
6. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Toner cartridge 1 Is the developing bias or supply bias YES Clean. / Replace.
3 Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact YES Clean. / Replace.
in good condition?
snapped harness)
3. Replace LPH.
board.
4-39

4.5.12 Periodically uneven image
Scanner section
Scanner section 1 Is the FBS motor drive gear cracked YES Clean. / Replace.
or dirty with foreign object?
2 Is the scanner motor secured NO Secure properly.
properly?
3 Is the carriage adjusting part secured NO Secure properly.
properly?
4 Is the carriage secured properly to NO Secure properly.
the belt?
5 Are the FBS belt attached loosely? YES Adjust the belt tension.
6 Are the scanner rails damaged or YES Clean. / Replace.
dirty with foreign object?
5. Replace LPH.
Printer section
Toner cartridge 1 Is the toner cartridge driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive
Replace toner cartridge.
Drum cartridge 2 Are the drum and transfer roller NO Correct. / Replace drive
driven properly? coupling mechanism of drum
Replace drive coupling
mechanism of transfer roller
and machine.
Paper path 3 Is the resist roller driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive
coupling mechanism.
Fusing unit 4 Is the fusing unit driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive
coupling mechanism.
4-40

4.5.13 Uneven image density
Scanner section
background level.
2 Is the shading sheet under the YES Clean.
contact cover dirty? If the trouble is not settled
background level.
5. Replace LPH.

background level.
2 Is the shading plate for DADF YES Clean.
scnanning section dirty? If the trouble is not settled
background level.
remain intact?
6. Replace LPH.
4-41

Printer section
Toner cartridge 1 Is the toner cartridge driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive
Replace the toner cartridge.
2 Is the developing bias or supply bias YES Clean. / Replace.
contact terminal dirty or deformed?)
3 Is the gap roller dirty or broken? YES Clean. / Replace.
Fusing unit 6 Is the fusing roller dirty or damaged? YES Clean. / Replace.
dirty or deformed?
8 Is the transfer roller dented or YES Replace.
damaged?
in good condition?
snapped harness)
3. Replace fusing unit.
4. Replace LPH.
board.
4-42

4.6 Document trouble
Mechanical Errors
Symptom Possible Cause Countermeasure
While The ADF does not feed the The pickup roller is dirty or worn Clean the roller.
feeding a document. out. Replace the roller.
document The power of the separation Adjust the separation pressure.
roller is getting decrease. The Clean the roller.
separation pad pressure does
not match the paper quality.
The motor is not rotating. Replace the motor.
While The feeder stops the feed- The malfunction of the sensor. Replace the sensor.
scanning ing job while the document The motor power is not working Replace the motor.
document is taken into the feeder. properly.
The roller is dirty. Clean the roller.
The roller is worn out. Replace the roller.
The document is stuck and Foreign objects entered the feed Remove the objects.
gets damaged while taken area.
into the feeder. The paper quality is not acceptable. Recommend the customer to use
The paper shape is not acceptable. the document glass.
Sensor Malfunctions

While No beep sound when you DS1 sensor defect 0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor
feeding a place the document. input test mode.
document (The beep sound volume 1 Confirm the LCD indication changes by moving the
setting could be OFF.) DS1 sensor.
OFF: No document / ON: Document
2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected.
3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the
DS1 sensor.
4 Replace the sensor harness.
5 (MFX-2570 only) Replace the RADF board.
6 (MFX-2570 only) Replace the harness between the
RADF board and main control board.
7 Replace the main control board.
APS sensor defect 0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor
input test mode.
1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening
and closing the platen cover.
OFF: Cover Open / ON: Document
APS sensor.
4-43

While The machine feeds the DS2 sensor defect 0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor
feeding document through the ADF input test mode.
document without scanning. 1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening
While The scan starting and end- the ADF cover and inserting a paper.
scanning ing area are not correct. OFF: No document / ON: Document
a docu- 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected.
ment 3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the
DS2 sensor.
DS3 sensor defect 0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor
(MFX-2570 only) input test mode.
1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening
the ADF cover and inserting a paper.
DS3 sensor.
5 Replace the CCD board.
6 Replace the harness between CCD board and
R-Scanner board.
7 Replace the R-Scanner board.
8 Replace the harness between the R-Scanner board
and RADF board.
7 Replace the RADF board.
8 Replace the harness between the RADF board and
main control board.
While a The LCD shows a warn- DS1, DS2 or DS3 Check “DS1 sensor defect”, “DS2 sensor defect” and
document ing while a document exits sensor defect “DS3 sensor defect” in that order.
exits after scanning.
The LCD shows a warning
after a document exits.
Others The message, “Please TXIL sensor defect 0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor
close the flashing cover.” input test mode.
is displayed on the LCD. 1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening
and closing the ADF cover.
The flashing cover: The OFF : Cover open / ON: Cover close
ADF cover 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected.
TXIL sensor.
7 Replace the connect board.
4-44

Scanning trouble

An unusual noise occurs. The belt has not been firmly inserted Check the belt.
into the belt holder.
While scan- The lamp at Harness is not firmly inserted to the Check the connectors.
ning FBS does connector.
not turn on LED lamp board defect. Replace.
LED lamp board harness defect. Replace.
CCD board defect. Replace the carriage.
Harness between CCD board and Replace the harness.
scanner board defect.
Scanner board defect. Replace the scanner board.
The lamp in Harness is not firmly inserted to the Check the connectors.
DADF does connector.
not turn on LED lamp board defect. Replace.
LED lamp board harness defect. Replace.
CCD board defect. Replace the R-Scanner Assy.
Harness between R-Scannser board Replace the harness.
and RADF board is defected.
RADF board defect. Replace the RADF board.
Harness between RADF board and Replace the harness.
main control board is defected.
Main control board defect. Replace the main control board.
The carriage HS sensor defect. 0 Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to dis-
is touching play the sensor input test mode.
the home 1 Remove the document glass and move
side (on the the carriage by hand, and confirm that
left toward the LCD indication changes.
the front) OFF: N ot home position
ON : H ome position
2 Check the sensor harness is firmly
connected.
3 If the LCD indication does not change,
replace the HS sensor.
5 Replace the scanner board.
6 Replace the harness between scanner
board and main control board.
The carriage FBS motor defect. 1 Check the motor harness is firmly con-
does not nected.
move. 2 Replace the FBS motor.
Scanner board defect. 1 Check the connectors are firmly con-
nected to the scanner board.
2 Replace the harness between scanner
board and main control board.
3 Replace the scanner board.
4-45

4.7 Recording Paper Jam
After removing the jammed paper, please open and close the side cover.
Mechanical errors
Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure
Jam in the Faulty movement of some cassette Check each movement of a cassette part.
paper supply parts. Replace the faulty part.
area
Paper is stuck in the recording Remove the stuck paper.
area.
The paper feed roller is worn out. Replace the roller.
Jam in the feed Paper is stuck in the feed area. Remove the jammed paper.
area
Jam in the Paper is stuck in the fuser or paper Remove the jammed paper.
fuser or the exit area.
paper exit area
The fuser roller is not clean. Clean the fuser roller.
Replace the fuser roller.
Electrical errors
Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure
Jam in the feed The paper supply electromagnetic • Check the wiring.
area clutch does not work. • Replace the paper supply electromagnetic clutch.
“Please close the • Replace the main control board.
flashing cover.”
The paper supply sensor (PSS) does Check that the wiring and actuator are working
not work. properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS, or
Main control board.
Jam in the feed The malfunction of the PPS. Check that the wiring and actuator are working
area properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS, or
“Please close the the main control board.
flashing cover.”
Jam in the feed The paper size is not correct. Check the paper, size setting.
area
“Check paper
size.....”
Jam in the fuser The paper discharge sensor (PDS) Check that the wiring and actuators are working
or paper exit does not work. properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PDS, or
area LPH board.
4-46

4.8 Machine malfunction
No. Symptom What to confirm Countermeasure

1 The LCD shows 1. Is the machine in energy save mode? Yes Press the energy save key, and release
nothing. the mode.
No Check No.2.
2. Is the power cable plugged correctly? Yes Check No.3.
No Plug the cable correctly.
3. Is the power switch On? Yes Check No.4.
No Power on.
4. Does the DC output voltages from Yes Check No.5.
the power supply unit to connector No Replace the power supply.
P3 on the main control boar have the
following output?
Pin 7, 9 +3.3 V
Pin 15, 17 +5.0 V
Pin 2, 4, 6 +12.0V
Pin 12, 14 +24.0V
P i n 1 , 3 , 5 , GND
8, 10, 11, 13,
19, 21, 23
5. Is the following connection OK? Yes Check No.6.
• LCD assembly to the Panel PCB. (P8) No Reconnect the connection or replace
• Panel PCB (P1:) to the harness to the the harness.
main control board. (P5A)
6. If you replace the panel board, the Yes Replace the panel board.
symptom will be fixed. No Check No.7.
7. If you replace the main board, the Yes Replace the main control board.
symptom will be fixed. No Replace the machine.
2 The LCD shows 1. If you close the flashing cover, the Yes Solved.
“Please close symptom will be fixed. No Check No.2.
the flashing 2. Is the cover secured firmly by Yes Check No.3.
cover.” screws? No Secure the cover properly.
3. Is the message shown after energy Yes Check No.4.
save mode is released? No Check No.5.
4. Does the LPH board P93-8 have Yes Check No.5.
+24V output? No Check No.6.
5. Press the sensor in the message and No Replace the sensor or the harness.
check the output changes to +3V
through GND. (The interlock +24V
through GND.)
Interlock : L PH board P93-11 Yes Check No.6.
JAMC1 : LPH board P93-3 Yes Check No.6.
JAMC2: M ain control board P17-7 Yes Check No.7.
ADF cover: Main control board P82-1 Yes Check No.7.
6. If you replace LPH board or the con- Yes Replace the circuit board or the har-
necting harness, the message will No ness.
disappear. Check No.7.
7. If you replace the main control board, Yes Replace the main control board.
the symptom will be fixed. No Replace the machine.
4-47

No Symptom What to confirm Countermeasure
3 Documents jam 1. Did you feed a single document? Yes Check No. 2.
frequently. No Check No. 3
The LCD shows
“Please reset 2. D
id you use thin paper or con- Yes Recommend the customer to use the docu-
the document.” verted paper? ment glass.
No Check No. 8.
3. Did you set documents more than Yes Check No. 4.

the capacity? No Check No. 5.
4. If you set documents within the Yes Solved.

capacity, the symptom be fixed. No Check No. 5.
5. Did you use wrinkled or curled Yes Recommend the customer to use the docu-
documents? ment glass.
No Check No. 6.
6. Does the machine still feed docu- Yes Check No. 7.

ments? No Check No. 8.
7. Does the machine still discharge Yes Check No. 23.

documents? No Check No. 24.
8. Does the clutch rotate properly? Yes Check No. 9.

No Replace the clutch.
9. Does the separate roller work Yes Check No. 11.

properly? No Check No. 10.
10. Does the transfer gear work Yes Check No. 11.
properly? No Adjust the gear.
11. Does the ADF motor rotate prop- Yes Check No. 12.
erly? No Replace the ADF motor.
12. Is the separation pad pressure Yes Check No. 13.
appropriate? No Adjust the separation pad pressure.
13. Do CN201-4, 5, 6 and 7 of the Yes Check No. 14.

power supply have +24V output? No Replace the power supply.
14. If you replace the harness Yes Replace the harness between the power
between the power supply and supply and main control board.
main control board, the message No Check No. 15.
will disappear.
15. Do P3-12, 14, 16, and 18 on the Yes Check No. 16.
main control board have +24V No Replace the main control board.
output ?
16. Has the DS1 sensor been Yes Check No. 17.
installed properly? No Re-install it properly.
17. Does the feeler for the DS1 sen- Yes Check No. 18.
sor work properly? No Replace the DS1 sensor feeler.
18. Does the feeler for the DS2 sen- Yes Check No. 19.
sor work properly? No Replace the DS2 sensor feeler.
19. Are there any foreign objects Yes Remove the objects.
stuck around paper guides? No Check No. 20.
20. Does the voltage level of P82-. on Yes Check No. 22.
the main control panel change to No Check No. 21.
+0V when the DS1 is ON, and to
+5V when the DS1 is OFF?
21. If you replace the DS1 sensor, the Yes Replace the DS1.
symptom will be fixed. No Replace the main control board.
4-48

3 Documents jam 22. Does the voltage level of P82-6 on Yes Check No. 23.
frequently. the main control panel change to No Check No. 24.
The LCD shows +0V when the DS2 is ON, and to
“Please reset the +5V when the DS2 is OFF?
document.”
23. If you replace the DS2 sensor, the Yes Replace the DS2.
symptom will be fixed. No Replace the main control board.
24. Is the separation roller dirty? Yes Replace the separation roller.
No Check No. 25.
25. Is the separation pad dirty? Yes Replace the separation pad.
No Replace the machine.
4 Documents skew 1. Have the document guides been Yes Check No. 2.
adjusted properly? No Re-adjust the guides properly.
2. Did you place different size docu- Yes Set only the same size documents.
ments at the same time? No Check No. 3.
3. Are there any foreign objects on the Yes Remove the objects.
paper pass? No Check No. 4.
4. Have the separator roller and the Yes Replace them.

pad separator been worn out? No Check No. 5.
5. Are there any problems with on Yes Check their operations.

the installations and operations of No Check No. 6.
the separator roller and the pad
separator?
6. Is the guide outer deformed? Yes Fix or replace it.

5 Documents get 1. Are they thin documents? Yes Recommend customer to use the docu-
wrinkled or torn ment glass.
frequently. No Check No. 2.
2. Are there any foreign objects on the Yes Remove the objects.
document tray? No Check No. 3.
3. Do the documents get wrinkled or Yes Check No. 4.

torn around the feeding entry area? No Check No. 6.
4. Has the entry area of the guide Yes Repair or replace it.
outer been deformed? No Check No. 7.
5. Is the separation pad dirty? Yes Replace the separation pad.

4-49

6 The warning mes- 1. Has the lamp been illuminated? Yes Check No. 2.
sage “ Lamp error. No Check No. 7.
Call for service.”
is displayed. 2. Is the CCD harness connecting cor- Yes Check No. 3.
rectly? No Connect the harness.
3. Are the sheet document press or Yes Clean, or replace them.

back ground level plate dirty? No Check No. 4.
4. Are the document glass or the mir- Yes Clean, or replace them.
rors dirty? No Check No. 5.
5. Are the mirror carriage belts or the Yes Check No. 4.

home sensor attached correctly? No Reattach them.
6. If you replace the home sensor or Yes Replace the sensor or the harness.
the connecting harness, the symp- No Check No. 7.
tom will be fixed.
7. If you replace the LED lamp board Yes Replace the carriage or the harness.
or the connecting harness, the Check No. 8.
symptom will be fixed. No
8. If you replace the carriage or the Yes Replace the circuit board or the har-
connecting harness, the symptom ness.
will be fixed. No Check No. 9.
9. If you replace the main control board Yes Replace the main control board.
or the connecting harness, the No Replace the machine.
symptom will be fixed.
7 The message “No 1. D

id you load paper in the cassette Yes Check No.2.
Paper” is dis- properly? No Re-load paper.
played.
2. Press the paper detection feeler
when the machine is in ready
mode, and check the sensor output
changes to +3V through GND.
Cassette 1 : M ain control board Yes Replace the sensor or the harness.
P14-4 No Check No. 3.
Cassette 2 : M ain control board Yes Replace the sensor or the harness.
P15-4 No Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the main control Yes Replace the main control board.
board, the symptom will be fixed. No Replace the machine.
8 Paper jams or the 1. Is there any paper jam on the paper Yes Remove the paper.
message “Open pass? No Check No. 2.
the flashing cover 2. Is there electrical continuity in the Yes Check No. 3.
and check......” harness between the PSS sensor No Replace the PSS sensor or the con-
is displayed. and the main control board? necting harness.
3. Is there electrical continuity in the YES Check No. 4.

harness between the PDS sensor NO Replace the connecting harness.
and the LPH board?
4. Is there electrical continuity in the YES Check No. 5.

harness between the main control NO Replace the connecting harness.
board and the LPH board?
5. If you replace the PSS sensor or Yes Replace the sensor.
the PDS sensor, the message will No Check No. 6.
disappear.
6. If you replace the LPH board, the Yes Replace the LPHboard.
message will disappear? No Check No. 7.
(PDS sensor only)
board, the message will disappear. No Replace the machine.
4-50

9 Paper skew. 1. If you re-load the document and make Yes Check No. 2.
more than 10 copies, paper skew still No Solved.
occurs.
2. Has the paper cassette been installed Yes Check No. 3.

properly? No Re-install it properly.
3. Does the cassette have any malfunc- Yes Replace the cassette.
tions? No Replace the machine.
10 When using the 1. If you print “Checkered Pattern”, the Yes Check No. 2.
auto feeder, the image will expands more vertically No The sender’s problem.
reception image than horizontally. (It might be caused by using unsuit-
expanded. Note: The following causes are also able documents, or sender transmis-
possible. The sender sent the sion problems.)
document data using unsuitable
documents like excessively thick
paper, no carbon paper, rear
carbon paper, and so on.
11 When using the 1. If you print “Checkered Pattern”, the Yes Check No. 2.
auto feeder, the image is more compressed vertically No The sender’s problem.
reception image than horizontally. (It might be caused by sender trans-
compressed. mission problems.)
2. If you pull out a paper from resist roller Yes Check No. 3.
and the fuser, the friction is normal. No Clean resist roller. Replace resist
roller or the fuser.
3. The electromagnetic clutch is normal. Yes Check No. 4.

No Replace the electromagnetic clutch.
12 The printouts are 1. Are copied and test print images too Yes Check No. 2.
too light. light, or uneven density? No The sender’s problem.
Note: The following causes are also (Possible causes are inappropriate
possible. The contrast set- contrast setting, using colored docu-
ting might be not appropriate. ments, poor line connection, using
Contrast irregularities are likely unsuitable documents, or sender
on printouts of documents con- transmission problems.)
taining thin lines or small blue
lettering.
2. If you replace the toner or the drum Yes Replace the toner or the drum car-
cartridge, the symptom will be fixed. tridge.
No Refer to the “Image Quality Prob-
lems”.
13 Clock malfunc- 1. Are there any errors in the clock set- Yes Follow the instruction manual.
tion ting process? No Check No. 2.
4-51

15 The machine 1. Is the machine verifying the pass- Yes Check No. 2.
does not receive word? No Check No. 3.
or send a FAX.
2. Is the password correct? Yes Stop using the password verification,
then check No. 3.
No Enter the correct password.
3. Does the machine communicate with Yes The operation might wrong, or counter
a right working machine? machine might have problem.
No Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the NCU board or the Yes Replace the NCU board or the har-
connecting harness, the symptom will ness.
be fixed. No Check No. 5.
16 The auto mem- 1. Has the auto reception been set? Yes Check No. 2.
ory reception No Set auto reception mode.
does not work.
2. If you replace the NCU board or the Yes Replace the NCU board or the har-
connecting harness, the symptom will ness.
17 A dial signal 1. Has the line type setting been set Yes Check No. 2.
output fails after correctly ? No Set the correct line type.
entering the
number from the 2. If you replace the NCU board or the Yes Replace the NCU board or the har-
numeric keys. connecting harness, the symptom will ness.
18 The line monitor 1. Has the volume setting been set to Yes Set the volume except OFF.
does not work. OFF? No Check No. 2.
2. H
as the setting for the line monitor Yes Check No. 3.
been set up? No Set up the setting.
3. If you replace the speaker or the con- Yes Replace the speaker or the harness.
necting harness, the symptom will be No Check No. 3.
fixed.
4-52

19 An unusual 1. Does the sound occur during scan- Yes Check No. 2.
sound occurs. ning? No Check No. 10.
2. Does the sound occur during scan- Yes Check No. 3.

ning using the ADF or document glass No Check No. 6.
?
3. Are there any objects interfering with Yes Remove the objects.
the roller or roller shaft? No Check No. 4.
4. Has the ADF motor sounded abnor- Yes Clean the roller. Check the harness.
mal? No Check No. 5.
the ADF gear? No Check No. 6.
6. Has the FBS motor sounded abnor- Yes Check the harness.
mal? No Check No. 7.
the FBS gear? No Check No. 8.
the FBS pulley? No Check No. 9.
9. Are there any objects interfering with Yes Remove the objects using lint free
the mirror carriage traveling surface? No waste.
Check No. 10.
10. Does the sound occur while record- Yes Check No. 11.
ing? No Check No. 17.
11. If you remove the drum or toner car- Yes Check No. 12.
tridge, the sound still occurs. No Replace the toner or drum cartridge.
the drum gear, developing gear, or No Check No. 13.
transfer gear?
13. If you replace the toner or drum car- Yes Replace the toner or drum cartridge.
tridge, the symptom will be fixed.
No Check No. 14.
14. If you replace the transfer roller or Yes Replace the transfer roller or fuser.
fuser, the symptom will be fixed. No Check No. 15.
the driving mechanism? No Check No. 16.
board, the symptom will be fixed. No Replace the machine.
20 The document 1. Have the main control board and the Yes Check No. 2.
memory can not battery been connected to P81? No Connect it.
be backed up.
2. Is the battery voltage above +3V Yes Check No. 5.
when the machine in shut down? No Check No. 3.
3. Did you charge the battery for more Yes Check No. 4.
than 24 hours? No Charge the battery.
4. If you replace the battery, the symp- Yes Replace the battery.
tom will be fixed. No Check No. 5.
4-53

21 Unit will not 1. Is the power cord connected correct Yes Check No.2.
power up. and power switch is turned on. No Connect the power cord and turn the
power on.
2. Is the electrical outlet is on? Yes Check No.3.

No Connect the machine to a proper
outlet.
3. Does the DC output voltages from the Yes Check No.4.
power supply unit to connector P3 on No Replace the power supply.
the main control boar have the follow-
ing output?
Pin 7, 9 +3.3 V
Pin 15, 17 +5.0 V
Pin 2, 4, 6 +12.0V
Pin 12, 14 +24.0V
P i n 1 , 3 , 5 , GND
8, 10, 11, 13,
19, 21, 23
4. Is the connection between the power Yes Check No.5.
supply unit and the main control board No Reconnect the connection or replace
OK? the harness.
5. If you replace the main board, the Yes Replace the main control board.
symptom will be fixed. No Replace the machine.
4-54

5 Maintenance & Adjustment
5.1 Maintenance schedule
Scanning Section
Maintenance Cycle (pages)
Parts Name Reference Page
Clean Replace
Covers —
Touch panel display —
ADF glass / DADF glass — See “Administra-
See “Administrators’s Guide”
Document glass — tors’s Guide”
Platen cover —
Platen cover pad —
Mirrors *1 — 5-64
60,000 sheets/letter
Assy Piece Separator *2 Wipe it with a soft cloth 5-16, 5-40
or 2 years
dampened with water. 60,000 sheets/letter
Roller Separate *2 If that does not clean the 5-12, 5-41
or 2 years
part, wipe it first with a soft
60,000 sheets/letter
Roller Pickup *2 cloth dampened with natu- 5-12, 5-41
or 2 years
ral detergent, then wipe it
Roller Feed / Roller Press with a soft cloth dampened — 5-13, 5-52
Roller Exit ADF / Roller Press with water. — 5-15, 5-50
20,000 hours (light
Lamp 5-62, 5-34
intensity: 70%)
*1 “” means to clean the parts when image quality problems occurs.
*2 Replace these parts at the same time.
Printer Section
Maintenance Cycle (pages) Reference
Parts Name
Clean Replace Page
See “User’s
Printer head Pull the cleaning rod —
Guide”
*3
Roller Pickup 60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 5-121
Assy Piece Pressure *3 60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 5-122
Roller Feed (Cassette 2) /
100,000 sheets/letter 5-126
Roller Press
Roller Feed Duplex / Roller Wipe it with a soft cloth
100,000 sheets/letter 5-110
Press dampened with alcohol.
Roller Pickup MP 60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 5-101
Pad Pressure MP 60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 5-101
Roller Register / Roller Press 100,000 sheets/letter 5-97
Roller Exit/ Roller Press 100,000 sheets/letter 5-108
Fuser — 100,000 sheets/letter 5-102
Roller Transfer — 60,000 sheets/letter 5-94
Filter VOC — 100,000 sheets/letter 5-120
*3 Replace these parts at the same time.
Note
The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to the
environment or usage of the machine, and the documents and paper that are used. The maintenance
cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be needed to maintain
the machine quality.
5-1

5.2 Disassembly procedures
Before assembling,
• Disconnect the power cable
• Disconnect the line cable and other cables
• Pull out the toner cartridge from the machine
• Pull out the drum cartridge from the machine, and cover it with a black clothe
5.2.1 ADF section (MFX-2550)................................................................................................... 5-4

TRAY DOCUMENT..............................................................................................................................5-4
COVER CONNECT..............................................................................................................................5-5
COVER PLATEN..................................................................................................................................5-6
COVER TX SIDE B..............................................................................................................................5-7
COVER TX SIDE F..............................................................................................................................5-8
GUIDE INNER A..................................................................................................................................5-9
GUIDE OUTER..................................................................................................................................5-10
ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR..............................................................................................................5-11
ROLLER PICKUP/ROLLER SEPARATOR........................................................................................5-12
ROLLER FEED..................................................................................................................................5-13
ROLLER EXIT ADF............................................................................................................................5-15
ASSY PIECE SEPARATOR...............................................................................................................5-16
MOTOR (STEPPING)........................................................................................................................5-17
SENSOR TXIL....................................................................................................................................5-18
ADF DRIVE GEARS...........................................................................................................................5-19
SENSOR (APS)..................................................................................................................................5-20
SENSOR DS1/DS2............................................................................................................................5-21
Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS...................................................................................5-22
5.2.2 ADF Section (MFX-2570)............................................................................................... 5-23
TRAY DOCUMENT............................................................................................................................5-23
COVER CONNECT............................................................................................................................5-24
COVER PLATEN................................................................................................................................5-25
COVER TX B......................................................................................................................................5-26
COVER TX F......................................................................................................................................5-27
DADF COVER TX..............................................................................................................................5-28
SENSOR (APS)..................................................................................................................................5-29
DADF FRAME SCANNER.................................................................................................................5-30
PCB RS..............................................................................................................................................5-31
COVER UPPER SCANNER...............................................................................................................5-32
PCB R-SCANNER..............................................................................................................................5-33
PCB LED-LAMP DADF......................................................................................................................5-34
MIRROR C/D......................................................................................................................................5-35
DADF GUIDE INNER A......................................................................................................................5-36
ROLLER REGIST...............................................................................................................................5-38
DRS SENSOR....................................................................................................................................5-39
ASSY PAD SEPARATOR..................................................................................................................5-40
ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR...........................................................................................................5-41
ROLLER PRESS A............................................................................................................................5-43
DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE........................................................................5-44
GEARS (FRONT)...............................................................................................................................5-45
CLUTCH.............................................................................................................................................5-46
SENSOR TXIL / DS1..........................................................................................................................5-47
MOTOR (STEPPING)........................................................................................................................5-48
GEARS (BACK)..................................................................................................................................5-49
ROLLER EXIT....................................................................................................................................5-50
SENSOR DS2....................................................................................................................................5-51
ROLLER FEED B...............................................................................................................................5-52
ROLLER FEED A...............................................................................................................................5-53
PCB RADF.........................................................................................................................................5-55
Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS...................................................................................5-56
5.2.3 Scanner section............................................................................................................... 5-57
ASSY COVER CONTACT..................................................................................................................5-57
ASSY COVER TOP............................................................................................................................5-58
FRAME SCANNER FBS....................................................................................................................5-59
5-2

SENSOR HS......................................................................................................................................5-61
PCB LED-LAMP FBS.........................................................................................................................5-62
HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE...................................................................................................................5-63
MIRROR A/B/C..................................................................................................................................5-64
MOTOR (STEPPING)........................................................................................................................5-65
PCB SCANNER.................................................................................................................................5-67
5.2.4 Panel section................................................................................................................... 5-68
PANEL................................................................................................................................................5-68
DISPLAY (LCD)..................................................................................................................................5-69
SPEAKER..........................................................................................................................................5-71
PCB PANEL.......................................................................................................................................5-72
PCB PANEL KEY1/KEY2...................................................................................................................5-73
5.2.5 PCB section..................................................................................................................... 5-74
PCB PDL............................................................................................................................................5-74
POWER-SUPPLY..............................................................................................................................5-75
PCB IS................................................................................................................................................5-76
PCB LPH............................................................................................................................................5-77
PCB MAIN..........................................................................................................................................5-78
PCB NCU...........................................................................................................................................5-79
PCB PSU............................................................................................................................................5-80
PCB CONNECT LPH.........................................................................................................................5-81
5.2.6 Printer section.................................................................................................................. 5-83
TRAY A MP/MP FLAPPER PAD........................................................................................................5-83
COVER FRONT.................................................................................................................................5-84
COVER OPTION/COVER SHIELD....................................................................................................5-85
COVER BACK....................................................................................................................................5-86
COVER JAM ACCESS.......................................................................................................................5-87
SOLENOID.........................................................................................................................................5-88
CLUTCH.............................................................................................................................................5-89
RX MOTOR........................................................................................................................................5-90
MOTOR (STEPPING)........................................................................................................................5-91
FRAME DRIVE/GEARS.....................................................................................................................5-92
ROLLER TRANSFER.........................................................................................................................5-94
ROLLER REGISTER..........................................................................................................................5-97
SENSOR TRAYS...............................................................................................................................5-98
SENSOR JAMC1...............................................................................................................................5-99
SENSOR PSS..................................................................................................................................5-100
ROLLER PICKUP MP/PAD PRESSURE MP...................................................................................5-101
PRINTER FUSER............................................................................................................................5-102
THERMISTOR..................................................................................................................................5-103
Assy Frame Outer (with Press Roller) / Assy Frame Inner (with Heat Roller)..................................5-104
ASSY INTERLOCK..........................................................................................................................5-105
SENSOR PDS/DPS (MFX-2550 only)..............................................................................................5-106
SENSOR PDS/DPS/SHIFT (MFX-2570 only)..................................................................................5-107
ROLLER EXIT (MFX-2550 only)......................................................................................................5-108
SHAFT ROLLER PRESS/ROLLER EXIT (MFX-2570 only).............................................................5-109
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX.................................................................................................................5-110
TONER SENSOR (PCB TOS) ........................................................................................................5-112
SENSOR PES1................................................................................................................................5-114
SENSOR OPEN1.............................................................................................................................5-115
PRINTER HEAD...............................................................................................................................5-116
MOTOR (STEPPING)......................................................................................................................5-118
WEIGHT PAPER A/B.......................................................................................................................5-119
FILTER VOC....................................................................................................................................5-120
5.2.7 Paper feeding section.................................................................................................... 5-121
ROLLER PICKUP (1st CST)/(2nd CST)...........................................................................................5-121
ASSY PIECE PRESSURE (1st CST)/(2nd CST).............................................................................5-122
PIECE COVER CST (1st CST paper dust)......................................................................................5-123
SENSOR JAMC2.............................................................................................................................5-124
SENSOR PES2................................................................................................................................5-125
ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST).......................................................................................................5-126
PLATE FRAME B.............................................................................................................................5-127
ASSY SHAFT JOINT (2nd CST)......................................................................................................5-128
SOLENOID (2nd CST).....................................................................................................................5-129
SENSOR OPEN2.............................................................................................................................5-130
5-3

5.2.1 ADF section (MFX-2550)
TRAY DOCUMENT
1. Release one hook [2] from the Cover platen [1].
2. Remove the TRAY DOCUMENT [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-4

COVER CONNECT
1. Remove one screw [1], then remove the COVER CONNECT [2].
2. Disconnect the connector [3] from the Plate PCL.
[1]
[3] [2]
Important
When attaching the Cover connect, be careful not to pinch the harness.
5-5

COVER PLATEN
1. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT)
2. Remove one screw [1].
3. Open the Cover platen [2], and lift upwards.
4. Tilt the Cover platen [2] back a little and release the hook [4] on the Hinge [3]. Then, remove the COVER
PLATEN [2].
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
5-6

COVER TX SIDE B
1. Open the Cover platen [1].
[1]
[2]
3. Close the Cover platen [1].

4. Open the Guide outer [3].
5. Release one hook [4], then remove the COVER TX SIDE B [5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
5-7

COVER TX SIDE F
[1]
[2]

4. Open the Guide outer [3].
5. Release one hook [4], then remove the COVER TX SIDE F [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
5-8

GUIDE INNER A
1. Remove the Tray document. (See TRAY DOCUMENT)
2. Remove the Cover TX side B. (See COVER TX SIDE B)
3. Remove the Cover TX side F. (See COVER TX SIDE F)
5. Cut the Cable tie [2].
6. Remove two screws [3], and remove the APS bracket [4].
7. Remove two screws [5].
8. Release one hook [6], then remove the GUIDE INNER A [7].
[7]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
5-9

GUIDE OUTER
4. Remove the Guide inner A [1]. (See GUIDE INNER A)
5. Remove the GUIDE OUTER [2].
[1]
[2]
5-10

ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR
2. Remove one Plastic ring [1].
3. Slide the Bearing [2] toward the center.
4. Remove Gear 40 0.6B [3].
5. Remove the ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR [4].
[4] [1]
[3]
[2]
5-11

ROLLER PICKUP/ROLLER SEPARATOR
2. Remove the ASSY shaft separator. (See ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR)
3. Remove one E-ring [1].
4. Remove one E-ring [2], then remove the ROLLER PICKUP [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
5. Remove three E-rings [4] and two Bearings D6 8 [5].

6. Remove one parallel pin [6] and the Shaft separator [7].
7. Remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR [8].
[4]
[4]
[5] [8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
5-12

ROLLER FEED
2. Remove three screws [2] and the Spring P earth [3].
3. Open the Guide inner B [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4. Remove two E-rings [5], two Bearings [6], and one Gear 27 0.5 [7].
[5]
[7]
[6]
[6]
[5]
5-13

5. Lift the ROLLER FEED [8] and remove by sliding as shown in below.
[8]
[8]
5-14

ROLLER EXIT ADF
2. Remove the Spring P earth. (See ROLLER FEED)
3. Open the Guide inner B [2].
4. Remove two E-rings [3], one Bearing [4], and one Gear 27 0.5 oneway [5].
[1]
[3] [5]
[6]
[2] [4]
[3]
5. Remove the ROLLER EXIT ADF [6] by sliding it.
[6]
5-15

ASSY PIECE SEPARATOR
2. Remove the ASSY shaft separator. (See ASSY SHAFT SEPARATOR)
3. Release two hooks [1], then remove the ASSY cover separator [2].
4. Remove the ASSY PIECE SEPARATOR [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
5-16

MOTOR (STEPPING)
2. Release the Cable tie [1].
3. Disconnect the connector [2].
4. Remove three screws [3], then remove the Bracket motor ADF [4].
[6] [4]
[3]
[2]
[3] [1]
5. Remove two screws [5], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [6].
[6]
[4]
[5]
[5]
5-17

SENSOR TXIL
2. Remove the Motor (stepping). (See MOTOR (STEPPING))
3. Remove the Gear 18/55 [1] and Gear 24/47 [2].
[4]
[2] [1]
4. Release the Cable tie [3].

5. Disconnect the connector and remove the SENSOR TXIL [4].
[4]
[3]
5-18

ADF DRIVE GEARS
3. Remove the Motor (stepping). (See MOTOR (STEPPING))
4. Remove the APS bracket. (See GUIDE INNER A)
5. Remove the Guide inner A. (See GUIDE INNER A)
6. Remove the Gear 18/55 [1].
7. Remove the Gear 24/47 [2].
8. Remove Gear 40 0.6B [3].
9. Remove two Gears 59 0.5 [4].
10. Remove one E-ring [5], then remove the Gear 27 0.5 [6].
11. Remove one E-ring [7], then remove the Gear 27 0.5 ONEWAY [8].
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[4] [6]
[1]
5-19

SENSOR (APS)
2. Release the hook from the inside and disconnect the connector, then remove the SENSOR (APS) [2].
[1]
[2]
5-20

SENSOR DS1/DS2
1. Remove the Guide inner A. (See GUIDE INNER A)
2. Loosen one screw [1] and open the Guide inner B [2].
3. Remove two screws [3], then remove the SENSOR DS1 [4] and SENSOR DS2 [5].
Important
When attaching the parts, close the Guide inner B first, then tighten the screw [1].
[3]
[3] [5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
5-21

Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS
2. Lay the Sheet document press [2] on the document glass, leaving 1 mm of clearance from the left corner.
3. Peel off the backing paper from the double-sided tape [3] on the Sheet document press.
5. Lightly press down on the Cover platen to affix the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS [2].
[1]
1m [3]
m
m
1m
[3] [2]
5-22

5.2.2 ADF Section (MFX-2570)
TRAY DOCUMENT
1. Release one hook [2] from the Cover platen [1].
2. Remove the TRAY DOCUMENT [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-23

COVER CONNECT
2. Disconnect two connectors [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Important
When attaching the Cover connect, be careful not to pinch the harness.
5-24

COVER PLATEN
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
4. Open the Cover platen [5], and lift upwards.

5. Tilt the Cover platen [5] back a little and release the hook [7] on the Hinge [6]. Then, remove the COVER
PLATEN [5].
[6]
[5]
[7]
5-25

COVER TX B
[1]
[2]

4. Open the DADF cover TX [3].
5. Release the two hooks [4], then remove the COVER TX B [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
5-26

COVER TX F
[1]
[2]

5. Release one hook [4], then remove the COVER TX F [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
5-27

DADF COVER TX
1. Remove the Cover TX B. (See COVER TX B)
2. Remove the Cover TX F. (See COVER TX F)
3. Remove the two shafts [1], then remove the DADF COVER TX [2].
* When removing the DADF COVER TX, lift it up slightly and remove it from the shaft on the front.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5-28

SENSOR (APS)
1. Remove the Cover TX F. (See COVER TX F)
2. Open the DADF Guide inner A [1].
3. Release the hook from the inside and disconnect the connector, then remove the SENSOR (APS) [2].
[1]
[2]
5-29

DADF FRAME SCANNER
2. Open the DADF guide inner A [2].
3. Release the four hooks [3], then remove the DADF FRAME SCANNER [4].
* There are four springs [5] that will come off in this procedure. Be sure not to lose any.
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3] [5]
[3]
[3]
4. Disconnect one connector [6].

5. Release the two hooks [7], then remove the Cover PCB scanner [8].
6. Disconnect two connectors [9], then remove the DADF FRAME SCANNER [10].
[7]
[8]
[10] [6] [9]
[9]
5-30

PCB RS
1. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER)
2. Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER)
3. Remove the Shaft press exit [1] and Roller press A [2].
4. Remove the two screws [3].
5. Remove the Cover lower scanner [5] while releasing the two hooks [4].
6. Remove one screw [6], then remove the Plate shield DADF B [7].
7. Disconnect the connector [8] and remove one screw [9], then remove the PCB RS [10].
[6]
[5]
[9] [3]
[7] [8]
[10]
[2]
[4]
[3] [1]
[4]
[2]
CAUTION
When removing the Cover lower scanner, be careful not to break the Glass contact.
Important
When assembling the Shaft press exit, make sure the side with the notch goes on the front side.
5-31

COVER UPPER SCANNER
3. Remove the Cover lower scanner. (See PCB RS)
[1]
5. Turn the DADF frame scanner over and remove the three screws [2], then remove the Plate shield DADF
A [3].
6. Remove the film harness [4].
7. Remove one screw [5], then remove the Plate FG DADF [6].
8. Remove the four screws [7].
9. Remove the COVER UPPER SCANNER [8].
[5]
[6]
[7] [7] [2]
[4]
[3]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[2]
[7]
5-32

PCB R-SCANNER
3. Remove the three screws [1], then remove the Plate shield DADF A [2].
4. Remove the film harness [3].
5. Remove the four screws [4].
6. Remove the PCB R-SCANNER [5].
[4] [4]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[4] [2]
[1]
[1]
5-33

PCB LED-LAMP DADF
3. Remove the Cover lower scanner. (See PCB RS)
4. Remove one screw [1] and one screw on the rear [2], then remove the Plate FG DADF [3].
5. Remove the two screws [4].
6. Disconnect the connector [5] and remove the Holder PCB LED ADF [6].
7. Remove the three Springs P LED PCB [7], then remove the PCB LED-LAMP DADF [8].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[7] [2]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
5-34

MIRROR C/D
3. Remove the Cover upper scanner. (See COVER UPPER SCANNER)
4. Release the six Mirror clamps [1], and remove MIRROR C [2] and MIRROR D [3].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
[1]
5-35

DADF GUIDE INNER A
3. Cut the tie wrap [1].
4. Remove the four screws [2], then remove the Plate shield DADF C [3].
5. Disconnect all PCB RADF [4] connectors.
7. Remove the four hooks [6] on the Guide harness, then remove the harness from the Guide harness.
[2] [3]
[2] [2]
[2]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
8. Remove one screw [7], then remove the Guide harness [8].
[7]
[8]
5-36

9. Disconnect one connector [9].
10. Remove one SR4 [10], then remove the Clutch [11].
11. Remove one E-ring [12], then slide the Bearing D6 8 [13] to the outer end.
12. Remove the DADF GUIDE INNER A [14] by lifting it up.
[14]
[12] [13]
[9] [10] [11]
5-37

ROLLER REGIST
2. Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A)
3. Turn the DADF guide inner A [1] over and remove one E-ring [2].
4. Remove Bearing D6 [3], then remove the ROLLER REGIST [4].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
5-38

DRS SENSOR
2. Remove the harness [1] from its path.
3. Disconnect the connector and release the hook, then remove the DRS SENSOR [2].
[1]
[2]
5-39

ASSY PAD SEPARATOR
1. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX)
2. Release the two hooks [1], then remove the ASSY PAD SEPARATOR [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
5-40

ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR
1. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX)
2. Remove the five screws [1], then remove the Guide outer A [2].
3. Remove one E-ring [3].
4. Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the Gear 26 [5] and Bearing D6 8 [6].
5. Remove the four E-rings [7].
6. Remove the two Bearings D6 [8], and move the two Bearings D6 [9] toward the center.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[7] [7] [7]

[3] [7]
[4] [5] [6] [8]
[9 ]
[9]
[8]
7. Remove the ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR [10].
5-41

[10]
5-42

ROLLER PRESS A
2. Remove the Guide outer A. (See ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR)
3. Remove one screw [1], then remove the Holder register [2] from the Shaft press roller [3].
4. Lift up the Shaft press roller [3] and remove the ROLLER PRESS A [4].
[4] [4] [3] [4] [1]
[2]
5-43

DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE
5. Remove the Sensor (APS). (See SENSOR (APS))
6. Remove one screw [1] and release the hook, then remove the Cover stamp [2].
7. Remove the six screws [3].
8. Remove one screw [4] and remove the ground wire from its path.
9. Remove the DADF GUIDE INNER B [5] equipped with DADF DRIVE.
[3]
[5]
[3] [4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5-44

GEARS (FRONT)
5. Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE.(See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped
with DADF DRIVE)
6. Remove one screw [1] and SR5 [2], then remove the Frame tension F [3], Tension pulley [4], and Spring
C tension F [5].
7. Remove the three E-rings [6], then remove the two Pulleys 24 6 [7], P pin 2 x 10 [8], and Belt (timing) [9].
8. Remove two Bearings D6 [10] and one Bearing D6 8 [11].
9. Remove the two screws [12], then remove the Plate hinge inner A [13].
10. Remove one SR5 [14], then remove the Torque-limiter [15] and GEAR 36 0.8 [16].
[8]
[10]
[6]
[11] [7] [ ] [ ]
6 3
[8] [1]
[12] [10]
[9]
[15] [7]
[6]
[13] [5]
[14]
[12]
[4] [2]
[16]
5-45

CLUTCH
2. Remove the harness guide. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A)
3. Disconnect the two connectors [1].
4. Remove the two screws [2], then remove the Stay drive sensor [3] and Clutch [4].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
5. Remove the Gear 15 [5], then remove one SR4 [6] and Bearing D6 [7].
6. Remove the Shaft clutch separator [8], then remove the CLUTCH [9].
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[3]
5-46

SENSOR TXIL / DS1
2. Disconnect two connectors [1], then remove the SENSOR TXIL [2], and SENSOR DS1 [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
[1]
5-47

MOTOR (STEPPING)
4. Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE. (See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped
with DADF DRIVE)
5. Remove the Stay drive sensor and Clutch. (See CLUTCH)
6. Remove the three screws [1], then remove the Frame motor [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
7. Remove the Gear 35 A [3].

8. Remove the two screws [4], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [5].
[4]
[3]
[5]
[4]
5-48

GEARS (BACK)
with DADF DRIVE)
6. Remove the Frame motor. (See MOTOR (STEPPING))
7. Remove the GEAR 52/30 [1].
10. Remove the two GEARs 35B [4].
11. Remove the two E-rings [5], then remove the two GEARs 52A [6].
12. Remove the Bearing D6 [7] and Bearing D6 8 [8].
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[8]
[4]
[6] [1]
[3] [5]
5-49

ROLLER EXIT
with DADF DRIVE)
5. Remove the Gears (front). (See GEARS (FRONT))
8. Remove the Gears (back). (See GEARS (BACK))
9. Remove the ROLLER EXIT [1].
[1]
5-50

SENSOR DS2
2. Open the DADF guide inner A [2].
3. Peel back the seal [3], then remove one screw [4].
4. Disconnect the connector and remove the SENSOR DS2 [5].
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
5-51

ROLLER FEED B
with DADF DRIVE)
9. Remove the ROLLER FEED B [1].
[1]
5-52

ROLLER FEED A
with DADF DRIVE)
9. Remove the two screws [1] and two hooks [2], then remove the Guide inner B [3].
10. Remove the two screws [4], then remove the Bracket DS2 [5].
11. Pull the harness [6] out through the hole.
12. Remove the Guide inner D [7].
13. Remove one E-ring [8] and Bearing D6 [9].
[1]
[7]
[3]
[2] [4] [1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[6]
[9]
[8]
5-53

13. Remove four screws [10], then remove the Frame drive [11].
14. Remove the ROLLER FEED A [12].
[12]
[11]
[10]
[10]
[10]
[10]
5-54

PCB RADF
2. Disconnect all connectors. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A)
3. Remove one screw. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A)
4. Remove three screws [1], then remove the PCB RADF [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
5-55

Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS
2. Lay the Sheet document press [2] on the document glass, leaving 1 mm of clearance from the left corner.
3. Peel off the backing paper from the double-sided tape [3] on the Sheet document press.
5. Lightly press down on the Cover platen to affix the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS [2].
[1]
[3]
1m
m
[2]
m
1m
[3]
5-56

5.2.3 Scanner section
ASSY COVER CONTACT
2. Remove two screws [2], then remove the ASSY COVER CONTACT [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Caution
When removing the ASSY cover contact, be careful not to break the Glass contact.
5-57

ASSY COVER TOP
1. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN)
2. Remove six screws [1], then remove the ASSY COVER TOP [2].
[1]
[1] [1]
[2]
[1] [1]
[1]
Caution
When removing the ASSY cover top, be careful not to break the Pane.
5-58

FRAME SCANNER FBS
2. Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP)
3. Remove the Flat harness [1], then remove the Core [2].
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the Flat harness [1] from its path.

5. Release the BELT (TIMING) [4] from the hooks [3] on the Frame scanner FBS.
[3]
[1]
[4]
5-59

6. Lift up the Shaft guide [5] and remove the FRAME SCANNER FBS [6].
[5]
[6]
5-60

SENSOR HS
3. Remove the Frame scanner FBS. (See FRAME SCANNER FBS)
4. Release the hooks, disconnect the connector [1], then remove the SENSOR HS [2].
[2]
[1]
5-61

PCB LED-LAMP FBS
4. Release two hooks [1], then remove the Cover lens [2].
5. Release two hooks [3], then remove the ASSY case lamp [4].
6. Remove two screws [5].
7. Remove one screw [6] and disconnect the connector [7], then remove the PCB LED-LAMP FBS [8].
[5]
[8]
[5]
[3] [6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-62

HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE
4. Remove two screws [1], then remove the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5-63

MIRROR A/B/C
4. Remove the ASSY case lamp. (See PCB LED-LAMP FBS)
5. Release eight Mirror clamps [1], and remove MIRROR A [2], MIRROR B [3], and MIRROR C [4].
[1]
[1]
[2] [4]
[1]
[1] [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
Caution
Handle the mirror gently to avoid from breaking it.
Important
When reassembling Mirror A/B/C, be sure the front side faces inwards and the side with the marking
faces outward.
5-64

MOTOR (STEPPING)
5. Remove three screws [3].
6. Slide the Bracket motor FBS [4], then remove the Belt (timing) [5].
[3]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
7. Remove the Spring C tension [6] and lift up the Bracket motor FBS [4].
[4]
[6]
5-65

8. Remove two screws [7] and disconnect the connector [8], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
[7]
5-66

PCB SCANNER
3. Remove three screws [1], then remove the Plate shield PCB scanner [2].
4. Disconnect all connectors.
5. Remove one screw [3], then remove the PCB SCANNER [4].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-67

5.2.4 Panel section
PANEL
4. Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION)
5. Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD)
7. Pull out the harness [2].
[1] [2]
8. Remove the Cover stay panel [3].

9. Remove four screws [4].
10. Open the Cover front [5], and pull the PANEL [6] forward to remove it.
[4]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
5-68

DISPLAY (LCD)
1. Remove the Cover platen.(See COVER PLATEN)
2. Remove the ASSY cover top.(See ASSY COVER TOP)
3. Remove the Panel.(See PANEL)
5. Disconnect the connector [2] from the Speaker and remove the Cover panel lower [3].
* If the connector is not disconnected, the Speaker harness may break. Be sure to disconnect the connector.
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
6. Remove four screws [4], then remove the Cover PCB panel [5].
7. Disconnect six connectors [6].
8. Remove three screws [7], then remove the Frame panel [8].
[4]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[7]
[6]
5-69

9. Remove two screws [9], then remove the DISPLAY (LCD) [10].
[9]
[10]
[9]
Caution
• Handle the LCD gently to avoid from breaking it.
• If the LCD breaks and the liquid comes into contact with your hands, rinse with water. If the liquid
enters your eyes or mouth, rinse with water and consult a physician.
5-70

SPEAKER
3. Remove the Panel. (See PANEL)
4. Remove the Cover panel lower. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
5. Remove two screws [1], then remove the SPEAKER [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
5-71

PCB PANEL
5. Remove the Cover PCB panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
6. Disconnect six connectors [1].
7. Remove four screws [2], then remove the PCB PANEL [3].
[1] [1]
[2]
[2]
[2] [1] [3]
[1]
[2]
5-72

PCB PANEL KEY1/KEY2
5. Remove the Cover PCB panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
6. Remove the Frame panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD))
7. Remove three screws [1], then remove the PCB PANEL KEY1 [2].
8. Remove one screw [3], then remove the PCB PANEL KEY2 [4].
[3]
[1] [1]
[1] [4]
[2]
5-73

5.2.5 PCB section
PCB PDL
5. Remove two PCB-PS [2].
6. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the PCB ASSY PDL [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
7. Remove four screws [5] and remove the PCB PDL [6].
[5]
[5]
[5] [6]
[5]
5-74

POWER-SUPPLY
4. Disconnect all Power-supply [1] connectors.
5. Remove three screws [2].
6. Remove the POWER-SUPPLY [1].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
5-75

PCB IS
1. Remove the Cover connect.(See COVER CONNECT)
2. Remove the Cover option.(See COVER OPTION)
3. Remove the Cover shield.(See COVER SHIELD)
4. Remove five screws [1].
5. Remove one PCB-P [2] from the PCB IS, then remove the PCB IS [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
6. Remove the CF card [4].
[4]
5-76

PCB LPH
4. Remove the PCB IS. (See PCB IS)
5. Remove the PCB Main. (See PCB MAIN)
5. Disconnect all PCB LPH [1] connectors.
6. Remove four screws [2], then remove the PCB LPH [1].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
5-77

PCB MAIN
4. Remove the PCB IS. (See PCB IS)
5. Remove two screws [1], then remove the Plate main B [2].
6. Remove one screw [3], then remove the Bracket lime [4].
7. Disconnect all PCB Main [5] connectors.
8. Remove nine screws [6], then remove the PCB MAIN [5].
[1]
[6]
[6] [5]
[6]
[6] [1]
[6]
[6] [6] [2]
[4]
[3]
[6] [6]
5-78

PCB NCU
1. Remove two screws, then remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION)
2. Open the Cover front [1].
4. Remove the Cover left [3] while pressing down on the two hooks.
[2]
[1]
[3]
5. Remove one screw [4] and release the Cable-clamp [5] on the harness. Then pull out the Plate NCU1 [6].
6. Disconnect the connector [7] and remove the PCB NCU [8].
[6]
[8] [7]
[4]
[5]
5-79

PCB PSU
2. Open the Cover front. (See PCB NCU)
3. Remove one screw. (See PCB NCU)
4. Release two hooks and remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU)
5. Disconnect the connector and remove the PCB NCU. (See PCB NCU)
6. Remove two screws [1], then pull the PCB PSU [2] out slightly and disconnect three connectors.
7. Remove the PCB PSU [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Important
The far end of the PCB PSU is engaged with the hook. When assembling, make sure to engage it with
the hook.
5-80

PCB CONNECT LPH
4. Disconnect all connectors between the Chassis FBS and PCB main.
5. Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK)
6. Open the Cover jam access [1].
7. Remove seven screws [2].
* Note the markings on the Chassis FBS to locate the proper screws.
8. Remove one screw [3], then remove the Chassis FBS [4].
[4] [2]
[2] [2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
9. Remove one screw [5], then remove the Cover left [6]. (See PCB NCU)
10. Remove three screws [7], then remove the Tray paper exit [8].
[7]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[7]
[6]
5-81

12. Remove two screws [10], then remove the PCB CONNECT LPH [11].
[9]
[10]
[11]
[10]
[9]
5-82

5.2.6 Printer section
TRAY A MP/MP FLAPPER PAD
1. Open the Tray A MP [1].
2. Release two hooks [2], then remove the TRAY A MP [1].
[2]
[1]
[2]
3. Peel off the MP FLAPPER PAD [3].
[3]
5-83

COVER FRONT
1. Pull out the ASSY cassette [1].
2. Open the COVER FRONT [2] and remove it by releasing two hooks.
[1]
[2]
5-84

COVER OPTION/COVER SHIELD
2. Remove two screws [1], then remove the COVER OPTION [2].
3. Remove nine screws [3], then remove the COVER SHIELD [4].
[3]
[3] [1]
[4]
[3] [2]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[3] [3]
5-85

COVER BACK
4. Remove two screws [1], then remove the Cover back [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
5-86

COVER JAM ACCESS
2. Remove the Stopper JAC [2].
3. Disconnect the PCB ERS lamp connector [3].
4. Remove the Stopper sensor [4].
5. Remove one screw [5], then remove the Sheet blind [6] and remove the harness from its path.
6. Remove the COVER JAM ACCESS [1].
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
5-87

SOLENOID
5. Remove one screw [1], then remove the Bracket SLND [2].
6. Disconnect the connector [3] and cut the Cable tie [4].
7. Remove one screw [5], then remove the SOLENOID [6].
[6]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
5-88

CLUTCH
5. Remove two Stopper rings [1].
7. Remove two CLUTCHes [3].
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
[2]
[3]
5-89

RX MOTOR
5. Remove four screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2], then remove the RX MOTOR [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
5-90

MOTOR (STEPPING)
5. Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH)
6. Remove two screws [1], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
5-91

FRAME DRIVE/GEARS
5. Remove three screws [1], then remove the Ground wire [2].
6. Remove five screws [3], then remove the FRAME DRIVE [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2] [3]
[3] [1]
[2]
7. Remove the GEAR 54/28H [5].

8. Remove the GEAR 73H/23H [6].
9. Remove the GEAR 61H 0.6 [7].
[4]
[6]
[5]
[7]
5-92

10. Remove the Clutch. (See CLUTCH)
11. Remove the GEAR 59H/19 [8].
13. Remove the GEAR 20 1.0A [10].
14. Remove the GEAR 21 1.0A [11].
15. Remove two screws [12], then disconnect the Ground wires [13].
16. Remove three screws [14], then remove the Stay pickup [15].
17. Remove the Spring clutch [16].
18. Remove the GEAR 34 0.8 [17].
19. Remove the GEAR 34 [18].
21. Remove the GEAR 33H/37 [20].
22. Remove the GEAR 22 [21].
23. Remove the GEAR 57H/27H [22].
[10]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[22]
[20]
[21]
[19]
[18] [17]
[15]
[16]
[13]
[14]
[12] [12]
[13]
5-93

ROLLER TRANSFER
2. Remove the Stopper JAC [2].
4. Disconnect the PCB ERS lamp connector [4], and remove the Guide inner [5].
[3]
[2]
[4]
[3]
5. Remove two screws [6], then remove the Cover bracket transfer [7] and Guide paper transfer A [8].
[6]
[1]
[7]
[5] [8]
[6]
5-94

6. Remove two screws [9], then remove the Bracket PCB LED [10].
[9]
[9]
[10]
7. Remove two screws [11], then remove the Guide paper transfer B [12] and the Plate discharge [13].
[13]
[11]
[11]
[12]
5-95

8. Remove one E-ring [14], then remove the Bracket transfer B [15] and the Bracket transfer F [16] from the
rear side of the Guide inner [5].
9. Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER [17].
[15] [17]
[14]
[16]
[5]
5-96

ROLLER REGISTER
1. Open the Cover jam access. (See ROLLER TRANSFER)
2. Remove the Stopper JAC. ( See ROLLER TRANSFER)
3. Remove the Guide inner. (See ROLLER TRANSFER)
4. Remove the E-ring 4 (DR4) [1] and the E-ring 5 (DR5) [2].
5. Remove the Gear 16H 0.8 [3], then remove two Bearing presses [4] and Spring C presses [5].
6. Remove the ROLLER REGISTER [6] by sliding it.
[2]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[6] [5]
[5]
[4]
[3] [4] [3]
5-97

SENSOR TRAYS
1. Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS)
2. Remove the Sensor stopper [1] from the bottom of the body.
3. Lift up the Feeler MP [2].
4. Release the hook from the bottom of the body and remove the SENSOR TRAYS [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-98

SENSOR JAMC1
5. Open the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS)
6. Remove the Sensor stopper [1].
7. Release the hooks and remove the SENSOR JAMC1 [2].
[2]
[1]
5-99

SENSOR PSS
2. Remove one screw [1], then remove the Guide press B [3] while lifting the Feeler PSS [2].
3. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PSS [4].
[2]
[2] [3]
[4]
[1]
5-100

ROLLER PICKUP MP/PAD PRESSURE MP
5. Remove the Clutch [1]. (See CLUTCH)
7. Remove two E-rings [2].
8. Lift up the Guide paper MPDUP [3] and push down the MP pressure [4].
9. Remove the ROLLER PICKUP MP [5] by sliding it to the left.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[2]
[5]
10. Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP [6].
[6]
Important
When attaching the Pad pressure MP, align it with the notch in the main unit.
5-101

PRINTER FUSER
1. Open the Cover jam access.
2. Remove five screws [1].
3. Disconnect two connectors [2] and remove the PRINTER FUSER [3].
[2] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
Caution
• Before removing the Printer fuser, make sure the power cord is unplugged. Failure to do so may result
in electrical shock.
• Make sure the Printer fuser become cool before removing it. The Roller heat is extremely HOT
immediately after operation and may cause burns.
• Do not touch the thermostat or thermal fuse while performing this procedure.
5-102

THERMISTOR
2. Remove the Printer fuser. (See PRINTER FUSER)
3. Remove one screw [1], then remove the THERMISTOR [2].
[2]
[1]
Caution
• Be careful not to bend the Thermistor.
• Pay attention to the orientation of the Thermistor when mounting it. The smooth side should face the
Roller heat.
5-103

Assy Frame Outer (with Press Roller) / Assy Frame Inner (with Heat Roller)
2. Remove the Printer fuser. (See PRINTER FUSER)
3. Remove seven screws [1].
4. Remove Assy Frame Outer (with Press Roller) [2] from Assy Frame Inner (with Heat Roller) [3].
[1] [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
5-104

ASSY INTERLOCK
6. Remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU)
7. Remove the Tray paper exit. (See PCB CONNECT LPH)
9. Remove one screw [2], then remove the Plate upper FG [3].
10. Remove five screws [4], then remove the Plate FG exit [5] and the Frame upper [6].
11. Disconnect the connector [7] and remove the ASSY INTERLOCK [8].
[4] [4]
[6]
[2] [3]
[4]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[4] [8]
[1]
5-105

SENSOR PDS/DPS (MFX-2550 only)
9. Remove the Frame upper [2]. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
10. Disconnect the connectors, release the hooks from the reverse side and remove the SENSORs PDS/
DPS [3].
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-106

SENSOR PDS/DPS/SHIFT (MFX-2570 only)
7. Remove the Frame upper. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
8. Remove the Roller exit. (See SHAFT ROLLER PRESS/ROLLER EXIT)
9. Remove the two screws [1], then remove the Guide fuser [2].
10. Remove the connector of Sensor PDS [3]/DPS [4], and remove the harness from its path.
11. Release the hooks from the reverse side and remove the SENSOR PDS [3]/DPS [4].
12. Disconnect the connectors, release the hooks from the reverse side and remove the SENSOR SHIFT [5].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
5-107

ROLLER EXIT (MFX-2550 only)
8. Open the Cover jam access. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
10. Remove two E-rings [1], then remove the Bearing D6 9 [2].
11. Loosen two screws [3] in the Guide fuser.
12. Remove the ROLLER EXIT [4] by sliding it.
[3]
[3]
[2] [1]
[1]
[4]
Important
When assembling Bearing D6 9, make sure it is aligned with the notch in the Frame upper.
5-108

SHAFT ROLLER PRESS/ROLLER EXIT (MFX-2570 only)
8. Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the Guide shift unit [2], Supported gear [3], Gear 20 [4],
parallel pin [5], and two Bearings D6 9 [6].
9. Remove the Rack shift unit [7], Shaft roller press [8], and Roller exit [9] all together.
10. Remove the SHAFT ROLLER PRESS [8] from the Rack shift unit [7].
* When doing so, be careful because the plate spring [10] and the coil spring [11] will come off at the
same time.
11. Remove one E-ring [12], then remove the ROLLER EXIT [9].
[1]
[12]
[7]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[10]
[11]
5-109

ROLLER FEED DUPLEX
2. Remove the Guide inner. (See ROLLER TRANSFER)
3. Remove two screws [1], then remove the Guide upper JAC [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
4. Remove four E-rings [3], then remove two Flange pulleys [4].
5. Remove the Belt (timing) [5] from the Gear 20/25P [6].
6. Remove two Gears 20/25P [6].
7. Remove four Bearings D6 8 [7].
[6]
[5] [4] [7]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[6] [3]
[7]
[7]
5-110

8. Remove the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX [8].
[8]
5-111

TONER SENSOR (PCB TOS)
6. Remove the Cover front. (See COVER FRONT)
7. Lower the Knob pressure [1] to the left.
[1]

9. Release two hooks [3], and remove the Bracket toner sensor B [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
5-112

10. Remove one screw [5], then remove the PCB TOS [6].
[5]
[6]
11. Release two hooks [7], then remove the Bracket toner sensor [8].
[8]
[7]
[7]
12. Remove one screw [9], then remove the PCB TOS [10].
[9]
[10]
5-113

SENSOR PES1
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st.
2. Remove one screw [1] using a short screwdriver, then remove the Bracket sensor [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PES1 [3].
[3]
[2]
5-114

SENSOR OPEN1
5. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR OPEN1 [1].
[1]
5-115

PRINTER HEAD
6. Open the Cover jam access. (See ASSY INTERLOCK)
9. Open the Cover front, then remove the developer and the drum. (See COVER FRONT)
10. Pull out the Film harness [1].
11. Remove two screws [2], then disconnect the Ground wires [3].
12. Remove two screws [4], then remove the Stay LED [5] and the Bracket LED [6].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[6]
5-116

11. Push down the hooks [7] and remove the PRINTER HEAD[8].
[7]
[8]
[7]
Important
When inserting the harness, make sure it goes all the way in.
5-117

MOTOR (STEPPING)
8. Disconnect the connector [2] from the PCB LPH [1].
[1]
[2]
9. Remove the two screws [3], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [4].
[4]
[3]
[3]
5-118

WEIGHT PAPER A/B
1. Remove both sets of two shafts [1], and remove the WEIGHT PAPER A [2] and WEIGHT PAPER B [3].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
5-119

FILTER VOC
5. Remove the FILTER VOC [1].
[1]
5-120

5.2.7 Paper feeding section
ROLLER PICKUP (1st CST)/(2nd CST)
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st [1].
2. Remove one Stopper ring [2] and Bearing [3].
3. Remove the ROLLER PICKUP CST [4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-121

ASSY PIECE PRESSURE (1st CST)/(2nd CST)
1. Remove the Roller pickup. (See ROLLER PICKUP)
2. Remove the ASSY PIECE PRESSURE [1].
[1]
5-122

PIECE COVER CST (1st CST paper dust)
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st [1].
2. Remove two screws [2], then remove the PIECE COVER CST [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
Important
Paper dust will collect in the Piece cover CST. Empty it when it becomes full.
5-123

SENSOR JAMC2
1. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit.
2. Open the Cover jam access 2nd [2].
3. Remove the Sensor stopper [3].
4. Release the hook on the inside and remove the SENSOR JAMC2 [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
5-124

SENSOR PES2
2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd [2].
3. Turn the Printer cassette 2nd [3] over.
4. Remove one screw [4], then remove the Bracket sensor [5].
5. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PES2 [6].
[1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
[2]
5-125

ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST)
2. Remove two screws [2], then remove the Guide paper [3].
3. Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the Bearing D6 [5].
4. Remove one screw [6], then remove the Plate frame F [7].
5. Remove the ROLLER FEED 2ND [8].
[2]
[3]
[8] [2]
[1] [4]
[5] [6]
[7]
5-126

PLATE FRAME B
1. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2)
2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd. (See SENSOR PES2)
3. Remove the Roller feed 2nd. (See ROLLER FEED 2ND)
5. Remove two screws [3], then remove the PLATE FRAME B [4].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
5-127

ASSY SHAFT JOINT (2nd CST)
1. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2)
4. Remove the Plate frame B [1]. (See PLATE FRAME B)
5. Remove three screws [2], then remove the Holder gear 2nd [3].
6. Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the ASSY SHAFT JOINT [5].
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
[2]
5-128

SOLENOID (2nd CST)
4. Remove the Plate frame B [1]. (See PLATE FRAME B)
5. Remove one screw [2], then remove the SOLENOID (2nd CST) [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
5-129

SENSOR OPEN2
4. Remove the Plate frame B. (See PLATE FRAME B)
5. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR OPEN2 [1].
[1]
5-130

5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette.
2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS.
3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.
5.3.2 Printer registration mode

This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
2. Select the paper source you want to adjust.
3. Select “Vertical registration” or “Horizontal registration”.
6. Adjust the printer registration:

For example:
When you set “+12.3” for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set
“–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward.
When you set “+12.3” for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you
set “”–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between ”–12.7 mm” and
“+12.7 mm”.
7. Press [Enter].
NOTE
However you select cassette 1, 2, Bypass tray, or Duplex Unit in step 3, the adjustment in vertical
direction is copied to all other paper source.
5-131

Printer registration (top)
Test pattern H
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard Setting Range
-12.8 to 12.7 (mm)
10 ± 1.5 (mm)
(0.1 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1  0)
3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (See “3.12.2 Printer Test”.)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> the margin.
6. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
5-132

Printer registration (side)
Test pattern H
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard Setting Range
–12.8 to 12.7 (mm)
10 ± 1.8 (mm)
(0.6773 mm step)
1. Load letter paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1  0)
3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (See “3.12.2 Printer Test”.)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> the margin.
6. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
5-133

5.3.3 Zoom adjustment
FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
A
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.40
2003-01
NO.20031021
0.30
0.55
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
L R
Zoom ratio Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

– 1.5 to 1.5 %
100 % ± 1.0 % Machine parameter:017
(0.1 % step)
1. Load letter size paper to the first cassette.
2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass.
3. Make two copies on paper in the first cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See “3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters”.)
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 017 meets the specification.
If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-134

FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.40
2003-01
NO.20031021
0.30
0.55
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
L R

– 1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification.

If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-135

ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
A
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.40
2003-01
NO.20031021
0.30
0.55
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
L R

– 1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
2. Place a Test Chart on the ADF.
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 012 meets the specification.
5-136

ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.40
2003-01
NO.20031021
0.30
0.55
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
L R

– 1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
2. Place a Test Chart in the ADF.

5-137

5.3.4 Registration adjustment
FBS registration (top)
Edge of the paper
A
Test Chart
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the first cassette
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

– 2.70 ~ 2.70 (mm)
0 ± 2.2 (mm) Machine parameter:018
(0.0212 mm step)
1. Load letter paper to the first cassette.
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjust-
ment.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
5-138

FBS registration (side)
Test Chart
1.40
0.10
Edge of
the paper
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

– 10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
1. Load letter paper to the 1st cassette.
3. Make a copy of it in the first cassette with 100 % magnification.
ment.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-139

ADF registration (top)
Edge of the paper
A
Test Chart
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

–10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
3. Make a copy of it in the first cassette with 100 % magnification.
ment.
5-140

ADF registration (side)
Test Chart
1.40
0.10
Edge of
the paper
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

– 10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
ment.
5-141

5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment
MFX-2550
1. Open the Guide outer.
2. Pick up the Assy Shaft Separator.
3. Remove the Assy Piece Separator. (See page 5-16.)
4. Adjust the separation pressure.
Rotate direction Separation pressure
Clockwise Up
Counterclockwise Down
Cover separator
Roller separator
MFX-2570
1. Open the Guide outer.
2. Remove the Assy pad separator. (See page 5-40.)
3. Adjust the separation pressure.
Rotate direction Separation pressure
Clockwise Down
Counterclockwise Up
5-142

5.3.6 FBS skew adjustment
When the image scanned with the document glass is skewed, you can adjust it by shifting a part.
1. Open the platen cover, and remove Assy Cover Contact. (see page 5-57)
2. Loosen two screws securing the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE.
3. Slide the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE to the right (the direction indicated with arrow) to adjust its posi-
tion.
4. When the adjustment is over, tighten the screws and reattach the Assy Cover Contact.
5-143

5.3.7 DADF skew adjustment
1. Remove the five screws [1], then remove the Guide outer A [2].
2. Remove one screw [3], then remove the Holder register [4].
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1] [1]
3. Invert the Holder register [4] and reinstall it.
[4]
Direction A
Reference
position
Position of Position of Direction B

screw when screw when
mounting adjusting
5-144

4. If the adjustment is made in direction A: the copied image will be rotated clockwise in relation to
the recording paper.
5. If the adjustment is made in direction B: the copied image will be rotated counterclockwise in rela-
tion to the recording paper.
5-145



Muratec America, Inc. 3301 E. Plano Parkway, Ste. 100 Plano, Texas 75074
(469) 429-3300 (Tel) (469) 429-3465 (Fax) www.muratec.com

Mfx2550 Field Engineering Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Mfx2550 Field Engineering Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MFX-2550 / MFX-2570

Field Engineering Manual

Muratec America, Inc. U.S. Version 4.0

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. Name Description

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. Name Description

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. Name Description

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

(Bypass Tray) Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF),

Alignment Upper left

Weight of Recording paper 60-90 g/m2, 20-24 lb(Cassette)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Auto Print of distributed document (ON/OFF) yes

Routing setting operation from machine control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

>(Duplex Printing) [Cassette]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Register section (MFX-2570 only)

The sizes of the documents are detected by the following sensors;

the tray or not

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Paper exit direction Shift direction (1 inch)

No. Part name

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.3.1 Drum Charge

2.3.2 Drum Exposure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Toner supply roller

Part Name Function

2.3.4 Image Transfer

Image transfer roller

High voltage unit - output

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine